Powtran PI500 7R5G3 Manual

Foreword Table of contents
Thank you for choosing POWTRAN PI9000 Series Frequency Inverter. This product Foreword.................................................................................................................1
made by POWTRAN is based on years of experience in professional production and Table of contents......................................................................................................2
sale, and designed for variety of industrial machinery, fan and water pump drive unit
and IF heavy-duty grinding unit. Chapter 1.Inspection and safety precautions..............................................................7
1-1. Inspection after unpacking.................................................................................7
This manual provides user the relevant precautions on installation, operational 1-1-1. Instructions on nameplate...............................................................................7
parameter setting, abnormal diagnosis, routine maintenance and safe use. In order to
1-1-2. Model designation .........................................................................................7
ensure correct installation and operation of the frequency converter, please carefully
read this manual before installing it. 1-2. Safety precautions .............................................................................................8
1-3. Precautions .....................................................................................................10
For any problem when using this product, please contact your local dealer authorized by
this company or directly contact this company, our professionals are happy to serve you. 1-4. Scope of applications ......................................................................................12
The end-users should hold this manual, and keep it well for future maintenance & care, Chapter 2 Standard specifications ...........................................................................14
2-1. Technical specifications...................................................................................14
and other application occasions. For any problem within the warranty period, please fill
out the warranty card and fax it to the our authorized dealer. 2-2. Standard specifications....................................................................................19
2-3. Dimensions.....................................................................................................23
The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. To obtain the
latest information, please visit our website. 2-3-1. Appearance and installation holes size ..........................................................23
2-3-2. PI9100 series ...............................................................................................24
For more product information, please visit: http:// www.Powtran.com。 2-3-3. PI9200 series ...............................................................................................27
2-3-4. PI9300 series ...............................................................................................29
POWTRAN
2-3-5. PI9400 series ...............................................................................................30
February , 2013
2-3-6. Keyboard size diagram.................................................................................31
Chapter 3 Keyboard ...............................................................................................33

3-1. Keyboard description ......................................................................................33
3-2. Keyboard Indicators ........................................................................................33
3-3. Description of operation panel keys .................................................................34
3-4. Examples of parameter settings .......................................................................34
3-4-1. Instructions on viewing and modifying function code....................................34
3-4-2. How to view status parameters .....................................................................36
3-4-3. Password settings.........................................................................................36
3-4-4. Motor parameter auto tunning ......................................................................36
1 2
Chapter 4 Commissioning ..................................................................................... 38 5-2-9. Keyboard and display: U7.00-U7.12 ........................................................... 135
Chapter 5 Function parameter ................................................................................ 40 5-2-10. Auxiliary function: U8.00-U8.53 .............................................................. 137
5-1. Menu grouping .............................................................................................. 40 5-2-11. Fault and protection:U9.00-U9.70............................................................. 146
5-1-1. d0 Group - Monitoring function group ......................................................... 41 5-2-12. PID function: UA.00-UA.28..................................................................... 157
5-1-2. U0 Group - Basic function group ................................................................. 44 5-2-13. Wobbulate, fixed-length and counting:Ub.00-Ub.09 .................................. 162
5-1-3. U1 Group - First motor parameters .............................................................. 49 5-2-14. Multi-stage command, simple PLC: UC.00-UC.51 .................................... 165
5-1-4. U2 Group - Vector control parameters.......................................................... 51 5-2-15. Communications parameters: Ud.00-Ud.06............................................... 170
5-1-5. U3 Group - V/F control parameters.............................................................. 53 5-2-16. Function code management:UP.00-UP.04.................................................. 171
5-1-6. U4 Gruop - Input terminals group ................................................................ 54 5-2-17. Torque control parameters:E0.00-E0.08 .................................................... 172
5-1-7. U5 Group - Output terminals group ............................................................. 59 5-2-18. Control optimization parameters: E5.00-E5.09 .......................................... 173
5-1-8. U6 Group - Start and stop control group....................................................... 62
Chapter 6 EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) .................................................. 176
5-1-9. U7 Group - Keyboard and display ............................................................... 64 6-1. Definition ..................................................................................................... 176
5-1-10. U8 Group - Auxiliary function group ......................................................... 66 6-2. EMC standard............................................................................................... 176
5-1-11. U9 Group - Fault and protection ................................................................ 71 6-3. EMC directive .............................................................................................. 176
5-1-12. UA Group - PID function .......................................................................... 78 6-3-1. Harmonic effect: ........................................................................................ 176
5-1-13. Ub Group - Wobbulate, fixed-length and counting ...................................... 81 6-3-2. Electromagnetic interference and installation precautions: ........................... 176
5-1-14. UC Group - Multi-stage command, simple PLC ......................................... 81 6-3-3. Remedies for the interferences from the surrounding electromagnetic
equipments to the inverter: ................................................................................... 177
5-1-15. Ud Group - Communication parameter ...................................................... 86
6-3-4. Remedies for the interferences from the inverter to the surrounding
5-1-16. UP Group - Function code management ..................................................... 87
electromagnetic equipments: ................................................................................ 177
5-1-17. E0 Group - Torque control parameters ....................................................... 88
6-3-5. Remedies for leakage current ..................................................................... 177
5-1-18. E5 Group - Control optimization parameters .............................................. 89
6-3-6. Precautions on installing EMC input filter at the input end of power supply . 178
5-2. Function parameter description ....................................................................... 89
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ................................................................................... 179
5-2-1. Basic monitoring parameters: d0.00-d0.61 ................................................... 89 7.1 Fault alarm and countermeasures .................................................................... 179
5-2-2. Basic function group: U0.00-U0.28 ............................................................. 93
Chapter 8 Installation and spare circuit ................................................................. 186
5-2-3. Motor parameters: U1.00-U1.37 .................................................................102 8-1. Operating environment.................................................................................. 186
5-2-4. Vector control parameters: U2.00-U2.22 .....................................................106 8-2. Installation direction and space...................................................................... 186
5-2-5. V/F control parameters: U3.00-U3.11 .........................................................108 8-3. Wiring diagram ............................................................................................. 186
5-2-6. Input terminals: U4.00-U4.39 ..................................................................... 111 8-3-1. Wiring diagram(< 11kW) ........................................................................... 187
5-2-7. Output terminals: U5.00-U5.22...................................................................125 8-3-2. Wiring diagram(11kW to 15kW) ................................................................ 188
5-2-8. Start and stop control: U6.00-U6.15............................................................130 8-3-3. Wiring diagram(18.5kW to 355kW)............................................................ 189
4
3
8-4. Main circuit terminal (G type) .......................................................................190 10-11-2. Input reactor(690V)................................................................................ 207
8-4-1. PI9000 main circuit terminal ......................................................................190 10-12. Output reactor ........................................................................................... 208
8-4-2. Function description of main circuit terminal ..............................................191 10-12-1. Output reactor(380V) ............................................................................. 208
8-5. Control circuit terminals ................................................................................191 10-12-2. Output reactor(690V) ............................................................................. 210
8-5-1. Description of control circuit terminals .......................................................191 10-13. AC reactor ................................................................................................ 212
8-5-2. Arrangement of control circuit terminals .....................................................193 10-14. Specifications of circuit breakers, cables and contactors ............................. 214
8-6. Wiring Precautions: .......................................................................................193 Chapter 11 Warranty ............................................................................................ 216
8-7. Spare Circuit .................................................................................................194 Appendix I RS485 Communication protocol......................................................... 218
I-1 Communication protocol.............................................................................. 218
Chapter 9 Maintenance and Repair .......................................................................195
9-1. Inspection and Maintenance ..........................................................................195 I-2 Check mode: ............................................................................................... 221
9-2. Parts for regular replacement .........................................................................196 I-3 Definition of communication parameter address .............................................. 223
9-3. Storage .........................................................................................................196 Appendix II How to use universal encoder expansion card .................................... 229
9-4. Measuring and readings.................................................................................196 II-1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 229
II-2 Description of mechanical installation and control terminals function ............. 229
Chapter 10 Options ..............................................................................................197
10-1. Options .......................................................................................................198 Warranty Card ................................................................................................ - 233 -
10-2. Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB)
............................................................................................................................198
10-3. AC reactor ..................................................................................................198
10-4. Noise filter ..................................................................................................200
10-5. Contactor ....................................................................................................200
10-6. Braking unit and braking resistor .................................................................200
10-7. Output EMI filter ........................................................................................201
10-8. AC output reactor ........................................................................................201
10-9. Input filter ...................................................................................................201
10-9-1. Intput filter(380V) ....................................................................................201
10-9-2. Intput filter(690V) ....................................................................................202
10-10. Output filter ..............................................................................................203
10-10-1. Output filter(380v) .................................................................................203
10-10-2. Output filter(690v) .................................................................................204
10-11. Input reactor ..............................................................................................204
10-11-1. Input reactor(380V) ................................................................................204
6
5
Chapter 1.Inspection and Safety Precautions Chapter 1.Inspection and Safety Precautions
1-2.Safety precautions
Chapter 1.Inspection and safety precautions Safety precautions in this manual are divided into the following two categories:
Chapter 1
Chapter 1
POWTRAN frequency inverters have been tested and inspected before leaving Danger: the dangers caused by failure to perform required operation, may result in
serious injury or even death;
factory. After purchasing, please check if its package is damaged due to careless
transportation, and if the specifications and model of the product are consistent with Caution:the dangers caused by failure to perform required operation, may
your order requirements. For any problem, please contact your local authorized result in moderate injury or minor injury, and equipment damage;
POWTRAN dealer or directly contact this company. Process Type Explanation
1-1.Inspection after unpacking ● When unpacking, if control system with water, parts
missed or component damaged are found, do not
※ Check if that packing container contains this unit, one manual and one warranty install!
card. ● If packing list does not match the real name, do not
※ Check the nameplate on the side of the frequency inverter to ensure that the install!
product you have received is right the one you ordered. ● Gently carry with care, otherwise there is the risk of
Before
1-1-1.Instructions on nameplate Danger damage to equipment!
installation ● Please do not use the damaged driver or the frequency
inverter with missed pieces, otherwise there is the risk
of injury!
TYPE: PI9100 7R5G3 ● Do not use your hand to touch the control system
Inverter model components, otherwise there is the risk of electrostatic
Input Power Spec.
SOURCE: 3φ 380V 50-60Hz
OUTPUT: 7.5KW 17A 0.00-400.0Hz damage!
Output Power Spec. ● Please install the unit on the metal or flame retardant
objects; away from combustible material. Failure to do
Production S.N. ZPB1A0100001
Danger so may cause a fire!
POWTRAN TECHNOLOGY CO.,LTD. ● Never twist the mounting bolts of the equipment
components, especially the bolt with the red mark!
When ● Do not let the lead wires or screws fall into the driver.
1-1-2.Model designation installing Otherwise which may cause damage to the driver!
● Keep the driver installed in the place where less
Note vibration, avoid direct sunlight.
Powtran Inverter ● When two or more converters are installed in a
Series Code
cabinet, please pay attention to the installation location,
910：PI9100 series ensure the good heat dissipation effect.
920：PI9200 series Input Voltage Level ● Must comply with this manual's guidance, any
1: Single-phase 220V 2: Three-phase 220V
3: Three-phase 380V 4: Three-phase 480V construction shall be performed by a professional
Class Code: 6: Three-phase 690V electrician, otherwise there would be the unexpected
0: Standard configuration risk !
1: Special 1 configuration
2: Special 2 configuration Function code (□) ● A circuit breaker must be set between the inverter and
G eneral Type F: Light load the power supply to separate them, otherwise it may
Type Code: G : Standard load
a: Standard(omitted) When cause a fire!
Danger ● Verify if power is a zero-energy status before wiring,
b: Enhanced d: Single board wiring
m: Mini otherwise there is a risk of electric shock!
● The inverter shall be grounded correctly according to
Version Number standard specifications, otherwise there is a danger of
0: Default (omitted) electrical shock!
1: Version upgrade Rated output capacity (● ● ●)
Example: 7R5: 7.5KW 132:132 KW ● Never connect the input power to the inverter output
terminals (U, V, W). Note that the mark of the
7 8
terminals, do not incorrectly connect wires! Otherwise injury or damage to this unit!
which may cause damage to the driver! ● When the inverter is operating, you should avoid that
● Ensure that the distribution line meets the regional objects fall into this unit.Otherwise cause damage to this
safety standards of EMC requirements. The diameter of Note unit!
Chapter 1
Chapter 1
used wire shall refer to the recommendations of this ● Do not start/stop the driver by switching on/off
manual. Otherwise it may cause an accident! contactor. Otherwise cause damage to this unit!
● Never directly connect braking resistor to the DC bus ● Do not perform repairs and maintenance for the live
(+) and (-) terminals. Otherwise it may cause a fire! electrical equipment. Otherwise there is a risk of
● Encoder must use the shielded wire, and the shielding electric shock!
layer must ensure the single-ended grounded! ● The repairs and maintenance task can be performed only
● Please confirm whether the input power voltage is when the inverter voltage is lower than AC36V, generally
same as the inverter rated voltage; wiring positions of that is two minutes after powering off. Otherwise, the
power input terminals(R, S, T) and output terminals(U, residual charge from capacitor would cause personal
V, W) are correct or not; and note that if there is a short
When
Danger injury!
circuit in the peripheral circuit connected to driver, if maintaining ● Non-well-trained professional personnel is not
Note the connected lines are tight, otherwise it may cause allowed to perform repairs and maintenance of inverter.
damage to the driver! Doing so may cause personal injury or damage to this
● Do not need to perform withstand voltage test for any unit!
Before part of the inverter, this product has been tested before ● After replacing the inverter, parameter settings must
energizing leaving factory. Otherwise it may cause an accident! be redone, all pluggable plugs can be operated only in
● The inverter's cover plate must close before power on. the case of powering off!
Otherwise it may cause an electric shock! 1-3.Precautions
● Wiring of all external accessories must comply with
Danger the guidance of this manual, please correctly wiring in N
Type Explanation
accordance with the circuit connection methods o.
described in this manual. Otherwise it may cause an Please perform motor insulation inspection for the first time
accident! use, re-use after leaving unused for a long time as well as
● Do not open cover plate after energizing. Otherwise Motor regular check, in order to prevent damage to the inverter
there is a risk of electric shock! 1 insulation because of the motor's winding insulation failure. Wiring
● Do not touch the driver and peripheral circuits with inspection between motor and inverter shall be disconnected, it is
wet hands. Otherwise there is a risk of electric shock! recommended that the 500V voltage type megger should be
● Do not touch any input and output terminals of the adopted and insulation resistance shall be not less than 5MΩ.
inverter. Otherwise there is a risk of electric shock! If the rated capacity of the selected motor does not match the
● The inverter automatically perform the safety testing inverter, especially when the inverter rated power is greater
After for the external strong electrical circuit in the early Motor thermal
2 than the motor rated power, be sure to adjust the motor
Danger stages of energizing, therefore never touch the driver protection
energizing protection parameter values inside inverter or install thermal
terminals(U, V, W) or motor terminals, otherwise there relay in the front of motor for motor protection.
is a risk of electric shock! The inverter output frequency rang is 0Hz to
● If you need to identify the parameters, please pay Run over
3200Hz(Maz.vector control only supports 300Hz). If the user is
attention to the danger of injury during motor rotation. 3 power
required to run at 50Hz or more, please consider the endurance
Otherwise it may cause an accident! frequency
of your mechanical devices.
● Please do not change the inverter manufacturer Vibrations of Inverter output frequency may be encountered mechanical
parameters. Otherwise it may cause damage to this unit! 4 mechanical resonance point of the load device, you can set jump frequency
● Do not touch the cooling fan and the discharge device parameter inside inverter to avoid the case.
resistor to feel the temperature. Otherwise it may cause The inverter output voltage is PWM wave that contains a
During burns!
Danger Motor heat certain amount of harmonics, so the temperature rise, noise and
operation ● Non-professional personnel is not allowed to detect 5
and noise vibration of motor show a slight higher than frequency power
signal when operating. Doing so may cause personal frequency operation.
9 10
Output side motor;
The inverter output is PWM wave, if the piezoresistor for
with 3) The inverter has built-in the adaptive motor standard
lightning protection or the capacitor for improving power factor
piezoresistor parameters, according to the actual situation, please identify
6 is installed in the output side, which easily cause the inverter
or capacitor motor parameters or accordingly modify the default values to
Chapter 1
Chapter 1
instantaneous overcurrent or even cause damage to the inverter.
for improving try to meet the actual value, otherwise it will operation affect
Please do not use.
power factor and protection performance;
If contactor is installed between power supply and inverter, the 4) When short-circuit of cable or motor internal will activate
contactor is not allowed to start/stop the inverter. Necessarily the inverter alarm, even bombing. Therefore, firstly perform
Contactor or need to use the contactor to control the inverter start/stop, the insulation short-circuit test for the initial installation of the
switch used in interval should not be less than one hour. Frequent charging motor and cable, routine maintenance often also need to
7 the inverter and discharging may reduce the service life of the inverter perform such test. Note that the parts to be tested and the
input/output capacitor. If the contactor or switch is equipped between output inverter shall be disconnected completely when testing.
terminals terminals and motor, the inverter should be turned on/off 1) Never connect the AC power to the inverter output
without output status, terminals(U, V, W).
otherwise which easily lead to damage to the inverter module. 2) Properly fix and lock the panel before powering on, so as to
PI series inverter is not suitable for use beyond the allowable avoid hurting the personal safety due to internal poor
Use other than capacitors.
operating voltage described in this manual, which easily cause
8 the rated
damage to the parts inside inverter. If necessary, please use the 3) Never perform wiring, checking and other operations after
voltage
corresponding transformer to change voltage. power is turned on.
Never change 4) Do not touch the internal circuit board and its components in
Never change PI series 3-phase inverter to 2-phase one for order to avoid the risk of electric shock after this unit is
3-phase input
9 application. Otherwise it will lead to malfunction or damage to powered,
to 2-phase
the inverter. 5) Do not touch internal circuit board and any parts after
input
The series inverter is equipped with lightning overcurrent powering off and within five minutes after keyboard indicator
Lightning protection device, so it has the ability of self-protection to lamp goes out, you must use the instrument to confirm that
10 surge lightning induction. For the area where lightning is frequent, 15 Others internal capacitor has been discharged fully, otherwise there is
protection user should also install the extra protection in the front of the a danger of electric shock.
inverter. 6) Body static electricity will seriously damage the internal
When the inverter is used in areas over 1000m altitude, it is MOS field-effect transistors, etc., if there are not anti-static
High altitude measures, do not touch the printed circuit board and IGBT
required to reduce frequency because the thin air will decrease
11 and derating internal device with hand, otherwise it may cause a
the cooling effect of inverter. Please consult our technician for
application malfunction.
details on the application.
If the user need to use methods other than the suggested wiring 7)The ground terminal of the inverter(E or ) shall be earthed
12 Special use diagram provided in this manual, such as common DC bus, firmly according to the provisions of the National Electrical
please consult our technician. Safety and other relevant standards. Do not shut down(power
Precautions off) by pulling switch, and only cut off the power until the
When electrolytic capacitors on the main circuit and printed motor stopping operation.
for scrap
13 circuit board as well as plastic parts are burned, it may produce 8) It is required to add the optional input filter attachment so as
disposal of the
toxic gases.Please disposing as industrial waste. to meet CE standards
inverter
1) Standard adaptive motor shall be four-pole asynchronous 1-4.Scope of applications
squirrel-cage induction motor or permanent magnet ※ This inverter is suitable for three-phase AC asynchronous motor and permanent
synchronous motor. Apart from the said motors, please select
magnet synchronous motor.
the inverter according to the motor rated current.
14
Adaptive
2) The cooling fan and the rotor shaft for non-inverter motor ※ This inverter can only be used in those occasions recognized by this company, an
motor unapproved use may result in fire, electric shock, explosion and other accidents.
are coaxially connected, the fan cooling effect is reduced when
the rotational speed is reduced, therefore, when the motor ※ If the inverter is used in such equipments(e.g: equipments for lifting persons,
works in overheating occasions, a strong exhaust fan should be aviation systems, safety equipment, etc.) and its malfunction may result in
retrofitted or replace non-inverter motor with the inverter personal injury or even death. In this case, please consult the manufacturer for
11 12
Chapter 1.Inspection and Safety Precautions Chapter 2 Standard Specifications
your application.
Chapter 2 Standard specifications
Only the well-trained personnel can be allowed to operate this unit, please
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
carefully read the instructions on safety, installation, operation and 2-1.Technical specifications
maintenance before use. The safe operation of this unit depends on proper Rated Rated
transport, installation, operation and maintenance! Inverter Input output Rated input output Adaptive
Base No.
model voltage power(k current(A) current( motor
W) A)
PI9100-0R4G2 0.4 3.4 2.1 0.4 9S2
PI9100-0R7G2 0.75 5 3.8 0.75 9S2
PI9100-1R5G2 1.5 5.8 5.1 1.5 9S2
PI9100-2R2G2 2.2 10.5 9 2.2 9S3
PI9100-3R7G2 3.7 14.6 13 3.7 9S3
PI9200-5R5G2 5.5 26 25 5.5 9L1
PI9200-7R5G2 3-phase 7.5 35 32 7.5 9L1
PI9200-011G2 220V 11 46.5 45 11 9L1

±15% 9L2
PI9200-015G2 15.0 62 60 15.0
PI9200-018G2 18.5 76 75 18.5 9L2
PI9200-022G2 22.0 91 90 22.0 9L3
PI9200-030G2 30.0 112.0 110 30.0 9L3
PI9200-037G2 37.0 157 152 37.0 9L3
PI9200-045G2 45.0 180 176 45.0 9L4
PI9200-055G2 55.0 214 210 55.0 9L4
PI9200-075G2 75 307 304 75 9L4
PI9100-0R7G3 3-phase 0.75 3.4 2.1 0.75 9S2

PI9100-1R5G3 380V 1.5 5.0 3.8 1.5 9S2
±15%
PI9100-2R2G3 2.2 5.8 5.1 2.2 9S2
PI9100-3R7G3 3.7 10.5 9 3.7 9S3
PI9100-5R5G3/
5.5 14.6 13 5.5 9S3/9S3
PI9100-5R5F3
PI9100-7R5G3/
7.5 20.5 17 7.5 9S4/9S4
PI9100-7R5F3
PI9200-011G3/
9L1/9L1/9
PI9200-011F3/ 11/11/15 26/26/35 25/25/32 11/11/15
L1
PI9200-015F3
13 14
Chapter 2 Standard Specification Chapter 2 Standard Specifications
Rated Rated Rated Rated
Inverter Input output Rated input output Adaptive Inverter Input output Rated input output Adaptive
Base No. Base No.
model voltage power(k current(A) current( motor model voltage power(k current(A) current( motor
W) A) W) A)
Chapter 2
Chapter 2
PI9200-015G3/ PI9300-220F3
15/18.5 35/38.5 32/37 15/18.5 9L1/9L1
PI9200-018F3 PI9300-200G3/
PI9200-018G3/ 200/220 385/430 380/426 200/220 9C2/9C2
18.5/22 38.5/46.5 37/45 18.5/22 9L2/9L2 PI9300-220F3
PI9200-022F3 PI9400-187G3/
PI9200-022G3/ 187/200 345/385 340/380 187/200 9P7/9P7
22/30 46.5/62 45/60 22/30 9L2/9L2 PI9400-200F3
PI9200-030F3
PI9400-200G3/
PI9200-030G3/ 200/220 385/430 380/426 200/220 9P7/9P7
30/37 62/76 60/75 30/37 9L3/9L3 PI9400-220F3
PI9200-037F3
PI9200-037G3/ PI9300-220G3 220 430 426 220 9C1
37/45 76/91 75/90 37/45 9L3/9L3 PI9300-220G3/
PI9200-045F3 220/250 430/468 426/465 220/250 9C2/9C2
PI9200-045G3/ PI9300-250F3
45/55 91/112 90/110 45/55 9L4/9L4
PI9200-055F3 PI9400-220G3 220 430 426 220 9P7
PI9400-045G3/ PI9300-250G3/
45/55 91/112 90/110 45/55 9P4/9P4 250/280 468/525 465/520 250/280 9C3/9C3
PI9400-055F3 PI9300-280F3
PI9200-055G3/ PI9300-280G3/
55/75 112/157 110/150 55/75 9L4/9L4 280/315 525/590 520/585 280/315 9C3/9C3
PI9200-075F3 PI9300-315F3
PI9400-055G3/ PI9300-315G3/
55/75 112/157 110/150 55/75 9P4/9P4 315/355 590/665 585/650 315/355 9C3/9C3
PI9400-075F3 PI9300-355F3
PI9200-075G3/ PI9300-355G3/
75/90 157/180 150/176 75/90 9L4/9L4 355/400 665/785 650/725 355/400 9C3/9C3
PI9200-090F3 PI9300-400F3
PI9400-075G3/ PI9100-0R7G4 0.75 3.4 2.1 0.75 9S2
75/90 157/180 150/176 75/90 9P5/9P5
PI9400-090F3
PI9200-090G3/ PI9100-1R5G4 1.5 5.0 3.8 1.5 9S2
90/110 180/214 176/210 90/110 9L5/9L5
PI9200-110F3 PI9100-2R2G4 2.2 5.8 5.1 2.2 9S2
PI9400-090G3/
90/110 180/214 176/210 90/110 9P5/9P5 PI9100-3R7G4 3.7 10.5 9 3.7 9S3
PI9400-110F3
PI9200-110G3/ PI9100-5R5G4/
110/132 214/256 210/253 110/132 9L5/9L5 5.5 14.6 13 5.5 9S3/9S3
PI9200-132F3 PI9100-5R5F4
PI9400-110G3/ PI9100-7R5G4/
110/132 214/256 210/253 110/132 9P6/9P6 7.5 20.5 17 7.5 9S4/9S4
PI9400-132F3 PI9100-7R5F4 3-phase
PI9200-132G3/ PI9200-011G4/
132/160 256/307 253/304 132/160 9L6/9L6 480V 9L1/9L1/9
PI9200-160F3 PI9200-011F4/ 11/11/15 26/26/35 25/25/32 11/11/15
L1
PI9400-132G3/ PI9200-015F4 ±15%
132/160 256/307 253/304 132/160 9P6/9P6 PI9200-015G4/
PI9400-160F3 15/18.5 35/38.5 32/37 15/18.5 9L1/9L1
PI9200-160G3/ PI9200-018F4
160/187 307/345 304/340 160/187 9L6/9L6 PI9200-018G4/
PI9200-187F3 18.5/22 38.5/46.5 37/45 18.5/22 9L2/9L2
PI9400-160G3/ PI9200-022F4
160/187 307/345 304/340 160/187 9P6/9P6 PI9200-022G4/
PI9400-187F3 22/30 46.5/62 45/60 22/30 9L2/9L2
PI9300-187G3/ PI9200-030F4
187/200 345/385 340/380 187/200 9C1/9C1 PI9200-030G4/
PI9300-200F3 30/37 62/76 60/75 30/37 9L3/9L3
PI9300-187G3/ PI9200-037F4
187/200 345/385 340/380 187/200 9C2/9C2 PI9200-037G4/
PI9300-200F3 37/45 76/91 75/90 37/45 9L3/9L3
PI9200-045F4
PI9300-200G3/ 200/220 385/430 380/426 200/220 9C1/9C1
15 16
Rated Rated Rated Rated
Inverter Input output Rated input output Adaptive Inverter Input output Rated input output Adaptive
Base No. Base No.
model voltage power(k current(A) current( motor model voltage power(k current(A) current( motor
W) A) W) A)
Chapter 2
Chapter 2
PI9200-045G4/ PI9400-220G4 220 430 426 220 9P7
45/55 91/112 90/110 45/55 9L4/9L4
PI9200-055F4 PI9300-250G4/
PI9400-045G4/ 250/280 468/525 465/520 250/280 9C3/9C3
45/55 91/112 90/110 45/55 9P4/9P4 PI9300-280F4
PI9400-055F4 PI9300-280G4/
PI9200-055G4/ 280/315 525/590 520/585 280/315 9C3/9C3
55/75 112/157 110/150 55/75 9L4/9L4 PI9300-315F4
PI9200-075F4
PI9300-315G4/
PI9400-055G4/ 315/355 590/665 585/650 315/355 9C3/9C3
55/75 112/157 110/150 55/75 9P4/9P4 PI9300-355F4
PI9400-075F4
PI9300-355G4/
PI9200-075G4/ 355/400 665/785 650/725 355/400 9C3/9C3
75/90 157/180 150/176 75/90 9L4/9L4 PI9300-400F4
PI9200-090F4 PI9200-055G6/
PI9400-075G4/ 55/75 70/90 62/85 55/75 9L4/9L4
75/90 157/180 150/176 75/90 9P5/9P5 PI9200-075F6
PI9400-090F4
PI9200-075G6/
PI9200-090G4/ 75/90 90/105 85/102 75/90 9L4/9L4
90/110 180/214 176/210 90/110 9L5/9L5 PI9200-090F6
PI9200-110F4
PI9200-090G6/
PI9400-090G4/ 90/110 105/130 102/125 90/110 9L5/9L5
90/110 180/214 176/210 90/110 9P5/9P5 PI9200-110F6
PI9400-110F4 PI9200-110G6/
PI9200-110G4/ 110/132 130/170 125/150 110/132 9L5/9L5
110/132 214/256 210/253 110/132 9L5/9L5 PI9200-132F6
PI9200-132F4
PI9200-132G6/
PI9400-110G4/ 132/160 170/200 150/175 132/160 9L6/9L6
110/132 214/256 210/253 110/132 9P6/9P6 PI9200-160F6
PI9400-132F4
PI9200-160G6/
PI9200-132G4/ 160/187 200/210 175/198 160/187 9L6/9L6
132/160 256/307 253/304 132/160 9L6/9L6 PI9200-187F6
PI9200-160F4 PI9300-187G6/
PI9400-132G4/ 187/200 210/235 198/215 187/200 9C2/9C2
132/160 256/307 253/304 132/160 9P6/9P6 PI9300-200F6
PI9400-160F4
PI9300-200G6/
PI9200-160G4/ 200/220 235/247 215/245 200/220 9C2/9C2
160/187 307/345 304/340 160/187 9L6/9L6 PI9300-220F6 3-phase
PI9200-187F4
PI9300-220G6/ 690V
PI9400-160G4/ 220/250 247/265 245/260 220/250 9C2/9C2
160/187 307/345 304/340 160/187 9P6/9P6 PI9300-250F6 ±15%
PI9400-187F4 PI9300-250G6/
PI9300-187G4/ 250/280 265/305 260/299 250/280 9C3/9C3
187/200 345/385 340/380 187/200 9C1/9C1 PI9300-280F6
PI9300-200F4
PI9300-280G6/
PI9300-187G4/ 280/315 305/350 299/330 280/315 9C3/9C3
187/200 345/385 340/380 187/200 9C2/9C2 PI9300-315F6
PI9300-200F4
PI9300-315G6/
PI9300-200G4/ 315/355 350/382 330/374 315/355 9C3/9C3
200/220 385/430 380/426 200/220 9C1/9C1 PI9300-355F6
PI9300-220F4 PI9300-355G6/
PI9300-200G4/ 355/400 382/435 374/410 355/400 9C3/9C3
200/220 385/430 380/426 200/220 9C2/9C2 PI9300-400F6
PI9300-220F4
PI9300-400G6/
PI9400-187G4/ 400/450 435/490 410/465 400/450 9C3/9C3
187/200 345/385 340/380 187/200 9P7/9P7 PI9300-450F6
PI9400-200F4
PI9300-450G6/
PI9400-200G4/ 450/500 490/595 465/550 450/500 9C3/9C3
200/220 385/430 380/426 200/220 9P7/9P7 PI9300-500F6
PI9400-220F4
PI9300-500G6 500 595 550 500 9C3
PI9300-220G4 220 430 426 220 9C1
PI9300-220G4/ PI9300-550G6 550 605 590 550 9C3
220/250 430/468 426/465 220/250 9C2/9C2
PI9300-250F4
17 18
Items Specifications
2-2.Standard specifications time:
Items Specifications 0.0 to 36.0 seconds, braking current value: 0.0% to
Chapter 2
Chapter 2
Single-phase 220, 50/60Hz Three-phase 220V, 100.0%
Jog Frequency Range: 0.00Hz to max. frequency;
50/60Hz Jogging control
Voltage and Jog Ac/deceleration time: 0.0s to 3600.0s
Single-phase 380, 50/60Hz Three-phase 480V,
Power
frequency levels Multi-speed Achieve up to 16-speed operation through the control

50/60Hz operation terminal
Three-phase 690V, 50/60Hz Easy to realize closed-loop control system for the process
Built-in PID control.
Allowable
Voltage:±15% Frequency:±5% Automatic voltage Automatically maintain a constant output voltage when
fluctuation
regulation(AVR) the voltage of electricity grid changes
Control system High performance vector control inverter based on DSP
"Excavator" feature - torque is automatically limited
Vector control:0 to 300Hz Torque limit and
Output frequency during the operation to prevent frequent overcurrent trip;
V/F control:0 to 3200Hz control the closed-loop vector mode is used to control torque.
V/F control, vector control W/O PG, vector control W/ Self-inspection of
Control method
Personalization function
PG peripherals after After powering on, peripheral equipment will perform
Automatic torque Realize low frequency (1Hz) and large output torque power-on safety testing, such as ground, short circuit, etc.
boost function control under the V/F control mode.
Common DC bus
Acceleration/dece Straight or S-curve mode. Four times available and time Multiple inverters can use a common DC bus.
function
leration control range is 0.0 to 6500.0s. The current limiting algorithm is used to reduce the
Cycle-by-cycle
V/F curve mode Linear, square root/m-th power, custom V/F curve inverter overcurrent probability, and improve whole unit
current limiting
G type:rated current 150% - 1 minute, rated current 180% anti-interference capability.
Over load - 2 seconds Timing control function: time setting range(0m to
Timing control
6500m)
capability F type:rated current 120% - 1 minute, rated current 150%
Running
Control system
- 2 seconds Keyboard/terminal/communication
Vector control:0 to 300Hz method
Maximum
V/F control:0 to 3200Hz 10 frequency settings available, including adjustable
frequency Frequency
DC(0 to 10V), adjustable DC(0 to 20mA), panel
0.5 to 16kHZ; automatically adjust carrier frequency setting
Carrier Frequency potentiometer, etc.
according to the load characteristics.
Input frequency Digital setting: 0.01Hz Analog setting: maximum Start signal Rotate forward/reverse
Input signal
resolution frequency×0.025% At most 16-speed can be set(run by using the multi-
Multi-speed
G type: 0.5Hz/150% (vector control W/O PG) function terminals or program)
Running
Start torque F type: 0.5Hz/100% (vector control W/O PG) Emergency
1:100 (vector control W/O PG) 1:1000 (vector control W/ Interrupt controller output
stop
Speed range PG) Wobbulate
Steady-speed Vector control W/O PG: ≤ ± 0.5% (rated synchronous Process control run
run
speed)
precision Vector control W/ PG: ≤ ± 0.02% (rated synchronous When the protection function is active, you can
Fault reset
speed) automatically or manually reset the fault condition.
Torque response ≤ 40ms (vector control W/O PG) PID feedback
Including DC(0 to 10V), DC(0 to 20mA)
Automatic torque boost; manual torque boost(0.1% to signal
Torque boost 30.0%) Running Motor status display, stop, ac/deceleration, constant
sig
ut
tp
DC braking DC braking frequency: 0.0Hz to max. frequency, braking status speed, program running status.
19 20
Items Specifications Items Specifications

Fault output Contact output - AC 250V 5A, DC 30V 5A protection Password and decoding
Two-way analog output, 16 signals can be selected such function
Chapter 2
Chapter 2
Analog output as frequency, current, voltage and other, output signal Monitoring objects including: running frequency, set
frequency, bus voltage, output voltage, output current,
range (0 to 10V / 0 to 20mA). Running
output power, output torque, input terminal status, output
Output signal At most 3-way output, there are 40 signals each way LED/OL informat terminal status, analog AI1 value, analog AI2 value,
Limit frequency, jump frequency, frequency ED ion motor actual running speed，PID set value percentage,
Run function display PID feedback value percentage.
compensation, auto-tuning, PID control
DC current Built-in PID regulates braking current to ensure sufficient keyboard At most save three error message, and the time, type,
Error
voltage, current, frequency and work status can be
Display
braking braking torque under no overcurrent condition. message
Three channels: operation panel, control terminals and queried when the failure is occurred.
Running
serial communication port. They can be switched through LED display Display parameters
command channel a variety of ways.
OLED display Optional, prompts operation content in Chinese/English
Total 5 frequency sources: digital, analog voltage, analog
Frequency source current, multi-speed and serial port. They can be switched text.
through a variety of ways. Copy parameter Quickly copy parameters by using the special
6 digital input terminals, compatible with active PNP or keyboard( only for OLED)
NPN input mode, one of them can be for high-speed Key lock and Lock part or all of keys, define the function scope of
Input terminals pulse input(0 to 100KHZ square wave); 2 analog input function selection some keys to prevent misuse.
terminals for voltage or current input.
Communic
2 digital output terminals, one of them can be for high-
The optional completely isolated RS485/RS232
ation
speed pulse output(0 to 100KHZ square wave); one relay
output terminal; 2 analog output terminals respectively for RS485/RS232 communication module can communicate with the host
Output terminals optional range (0 to 20mA or 0 to 10V), they can be used computer.
to set frequency, output frequency, speed and other
physical parameters. Environment -10 ℃ to 40 ℃ (temperature at 40 ℃ to 50 ℃ ,
Overvoltage protection, undervoltage protection, temperature please derating for use)
overcurrent protection, overload protection, overheat Storage
-20 ℃ to 65 ℃
protection, overcurrent stall protection, overvoltage stall temperature
Inverter
protection, losting-phase protection (optional), external Environment
Environment
protection Less than 90% R.H, does not exceed 90% R.H
fault, communication error, PID feedback signal humidity
abnormalities, PG failure and short circuit to ground Height and
Protection function
Below 1000m, below 5.9m/s² (= 0.6g)

protection. vibration
IGBT temperature Indoor where no sunlight or corrosive, explosive gas and
Displays current temperature IGBT water vapor, dust, flammable gas, oil mist, water vapor,
display Application sites
Inverter fan drip or salt, etc.
Can be set Altitude Below 1000m
control
Instantaneous Less than 15 milliseconds: continuous operation. Pollution degree 2
power-down More than 15 milliseconds: automatic detection of motor Product adopts
standard
Product
IEC61800-5-1:2007
restart speed, instantaneous power-down restart. safety standards.
Speed start The inverter automatically tracks motor speed after it Product adopts
IEC61800-3:2005
tracking method starts EMC standards.
Parameter Protect inverter parameters by setting administrator Cooling method Forced air cooling and natural air cooling
21 22
2-3.Dimensions 2-3-2.PI9100 series

2-3-1.Appearance and installation holes size 1. 9S2 to 9S4
Chapter 2
Chapter 2
1) 9S2
l
上盖板 W
Top cover plate b
d
操作面板
Operation panel
Movable
活动盖板cover plate
防护密封片
Sealing guard
控制电缆入口
Control cable inlet mounting position
安装位(可选)
(optional)
整机固定孔
L
Fixing holes
a
Air 风道进风口
duct inlet
普传变频器铭牌
Nameplate
H
d
Power Power Dimensions Installation size

supply Type
level (kW) L W H a b d
3-
phase
220V G 0.4 to 1.5
185 120 178.5 174 108 Ø5.3
3-
phase
380V G 0.75 to 2.2
23 24
2) 9S3 3) 9S4
W W
Chapter 2
Chapter 2
b b
d
d
L
a
L
a
H
H
d d

supply Type
Power Power Dimensions Installation size (kW) L W H a b d
level
supply Type
level (kW) L W H a b d 3- F 7.5
phase 285 180 200 272 167 Ø5.5
3- G 7.5
380V
phase G 2.2 to 4
220V
220 150 185.5 209 138 Ø5.3
3- F 5.5
phase
380V G 4 to 5.5
25 26
2-3-3.PI9200 series 3) 9L3

2. 9L1 to 9L6
Chapter 2
Chapter 2
supply Type Base No.
(kW) L W H a b d
W level
b d H 3- F 37 to 45
phase 9L3 480 296 246 460 200 Ø10
380V G 30 to 37
4) 9L4
3- F 55 to 90
L
a
phase 9L4 660 364 280 640 250 Ø10

380V G 45 to 75
5) 9L5
3- F 110 to 132
phase 9L5 710 453 280 690 350 Ø10
1) 9L1 380V G 90 to 110
Power Power Dimensions Installation size 6) 9L6
Base
supply Type Power Dimensions Installation size
(kW) No. L W H a b d Power
level supply Type Base No.
3- F 11 to 18.5
phase 9L1 360 220 210 340 150 Ø10 3- F 160
380V G 11 to 15
phase 9L6 910 480 323 890 350 Ø10
2) 9L2 380V G 132 to 160
Base
supply Type
(kW) No. L W H a b d
level
3- F 22 to 30
phase 9L2 435 225 242 415 165 Ø10
380V G 18.5 to 22
27 28
3） 9C3
2-3-4.PI9300 series Power Dimensions Installation size
Power
3. 9C1 to 9C3 (kW) L W H a b d
Chapter 2
Chapter 2
level
W H 3- F 280 to 400
b d
phase 9C3 1698 851 470 640 260 Ø13
380V G 250 to 355
2-3-5.PI9400 series
4. 9P4 to 9P7
W H
b
L d
a
a
1） 9C1 1) 9P4
Power Power Dimensions Installation size Power Dimensions Installation size
supply Type Base No. Power Base
(kW) L W H a b d supply Type
level (kW) No. L W H a b d
level
3- F 200 to 220
3- F 45 to 75
phase 9C1 1300 600 380 550 280 Ø13 phase 9P4 620 360 300 600 250 Ø10
380V G 200 to 220 G 45 to 55
380V
2） 9C2 2) 9P5
Power Power Dimensions Installation size Power Dimensions Installation size
supply Type Base No. Power Base
(kW) L W H a b d supply Type
level (kW) No. L W H a b d
level
3- F 200 to 250 3- F 90 to 110
phase 9C2 1540 515 421 464.5 367 Ø13 phase 9P5 680 323 320 660 250 Ø10
380V G 200 to 220 G 75 to 90
380V
29 30
3) 9P6 JP6E9100 keyboard case size diagram
Power Dimensions Installation size :
Power
(kW) L W H a b d
Chapter 2
Chapter 2
level
3- F 132 to 160
phase 9P6 750 472 324 730 350 Ø10
380V G 110 to 160
4) 9P7
3- F 200 to 220
phase 9P7 1000 600 383 938 370 Ø14
380V G 200 to 220
2-3-6.Keyboard size diagram

JP6E9100 size diagram: Install keyboard case on the panel, opening square hole is
required：（76±0.1）*（123±0.1）
31 32
Chapter 3 Keyboard Chapter 3 Keyboard
3-3.Description of operation panel keys
Chapter 3 Keyboard Sign Name Function
* Enter top menu parameter change status
Chapter 3
3-1.Keyboard description Parameter * Exit from function option change
PRG Setting/Exit Key * Return to status display menu from sub-menu or
function option menu
Chapter 3
* Select circularly parameters under run or stop
Shift Key interface; select parameters when modifying the
SHIFT
parameters.
Ascending Key * Data or function code ascending
Decending Key * Data or function code decending
RUN Run Key Used for running operation in the keyboard mode.
* Press the key to stop running in running status;
STOP press the key to reset in fault alarm status, can be
Stop/Reset Key
RESET used to reset the operation, the key is subject to
function code U7.00.
ENTER Enter Key * Enter into levels of menu screen, confirm settings.
* U0.03 is set to 4, keyboard potentiometer is used
Keyboard to set the running frequency.
JP6E9100 keyboard control panel potentiometer
Figure 3-1 Operation panel display
3-2.Keyboard Indicators 3-4.Examples of parameter settings
3-4-1.Instructions on viewing and modifying function code
Indicator flag Name
PI9000 inverter operation panel has three levels of menu structure for parameter
Running indicator
settings and other operations. Three levels of menu is as follows: function parameter
RUN * ON:means that inverter is in the operating status.
* OFF:means that inverter is in the stopped status. group (first level menu) → function code (second level menu) → function code settings
Command source indicator (third level menu). The operation flow is as shown in Fig.
That is the indicator for keyboard operation, terminal
Status lamp
LOCAL/RE operation and remote operation (communication control)

MOT * ON: terminal operation control status
* OFF: keyboard operation control status
* Flashing: in remote operation control status
Forward/reverse running lamp
FWD/REV
* ON: in forward status
Tuning/fault indicator
* ON: in torque control mode
TUNE/TC
* Slow flashing: in the tuning status
* Quick flashing: in the fault status
combination
indicator
Units
HzAV Units indicator
33 34
Chapter 3 Keyboard Chapter 3 Keyboard
Power-on
1) The function code can not be used to modify the parameters. Such as actual
detection parameters, run record parameters.
Shutdown param eter display
2) The function code can not be modified in the running status, can be modified
only after this unit is stopped.
PRG
3-4-2.How to view status parameters
Chapter 3
Chapter 3
PRG
Change
In stop or run status, operate shift keySHIFT
to display a variety of status parameters
param eter group respectively. Parameter display selection depends on function code U7.01 (run
First-level menu display
parameter 1), U7.02 (run parameter 2) and U7.03 (stop parameter 3).
In stop status, there are total 16 stop status parameters that can be set to display/not
display: set frequency, bus voltage, DI input status, DO output status, analog input AI1
voltage, analog input AI2 voltage, panel potentiometer input voltage, actual count value,
ENTER
PRG Change function
param eter
actual length value, PLC running step number, actual speed display, PID settings, high-
selection speed pulse input frequency and reserve, switch and display the selected parameter by
Second-l evel m enu displ ay
pressing key orderly.
In run status, there are 5 run status parameters: running frequency, set frequency,
Change function
ENTER ENTER param eter bus voltage, output voltage, output current default display, and other display parameters:
PRG value
output power, output torque, DI input status, DO output status, analog input AI1 voltage,
Third-level menu display
analog input AI2 voltage, panel potentiometer input voltage, actual count value, actual
length value, linear speed, PID settings and PID feedback, etc, their display depends on
Figure 3-2 Displ ay status and operation proces ses
function code U7.01 and U7.02 switch and display the selected parameter by pressing
Description: return to the second-level menu from the third-level menu by pressing
key orderly.
PRG key or ENTER key. The difference between the two keys : press ENTER to return
Inverter powers off and then powers on again, the displayed parameters are the
the second-level menu and save parameters setting before returning, and automatically
selected parameters before power-off.
transfer to the next function code; press PRG to return directly to the second-level menu,
do not save parameters setting, and return to current function code . 3-4-3.Password settings
Example 1 :restore factory settings
The inverter has password protection, when UP.00 is non-zero value, that is user
password, password protection will enter into force when you exit from function code
Press Press
PRG ENTER editing status, press the PRG key again , it will display "-----", you must enter correct
user password before entering regular menus, otherwise inaccessible.
Press
Press PRG ENTER To cancel the password protection function, firstly enter correct password to access
and then set UP.00 to 0.
Press
Press ENTER
Flicker 3-4-4.Motor parameter auto tunning
PRG to
confirm
Select the operating mode of vector control, you must accurately input parameters
Example 2 :change U0.08 from 50.00Hz to 40.00Hz of the motor's nameplate before inverter operation, PI9000 frequency inverter will
In the third-level menu status, if the parameter has not blinking bit, it means that match the standard motor parameters according to the nameplate parameters; the vector
the function code can not be modified, the possible causes include: control method is highly dependent on motor parameters, in order to get good control
Press Press performance, the accurate parameters of the controlled motor must be required
PRG ENTER Motor parameter auto tunning steps are as follows:
Press Firstly select command source (U0.02) as the comment channel for operation panel,
ENTER then input the following parameters according to the actual motor parameters (selection
Press PRG
is based on the current motor):
Press Motor
ENTER Parameters
to
Selection
confirm Motor U1.00: motor type selection U1.01: motor rated
Flicker
35 36
Chapter 3 Keyboard Chapter 4 Commissioning
power
U1.02: motor rated voltage U1.03: motor rated Chapter 4 Commissioning
current
U1.04: motor rated frequency U1.05: motor rated
speed
Commissioning
For asynchronous motors
Chapter 3
If the motor can completely disengage its load, please select 2 (asynchronous
Chapter 4
motor parameter comprehensive auto tunning) for U1.37, and then press the RUN key
on the keyboard panel, the inverter will automatically calculate the motor’s following Select control manner
parameters: (Set U0.01)
Motor
Parameters
Selection Correctly motor para meters
0 1 Correctly set motor and encoder para meters
(Set U1.00-U1.05, U1.27, U1.28, etc)
U1.06:asynchronous motor stator resistance (Set U1.00-U1.05)
Vector control W/O PG
U0.01=? Vector control W/ P G
U1.07:asynchronous motor rotor resistance

Motor U1.08:asynchronous motor leakage inductance V/F control
U1.09: asynchronous motor mutual inductance

2
Select appropriate ac/deceleration time
Select appropriate
U1.10: asynchronous motor no-load current ac/deceleration time
(Set U0.17, U0.18)
(Set U0.17, U0.18)
Complete motor parameter auto tunning
If the motor can NOT completely disengage its load, please select 1 (asynchronous
Select command source Motor parameter self-learning
motor parameter static auto tunning) for U1.37, and then press the RUN key on the
(Set U0.02) (Set U1.37)
keyboard panel. Motor parameter
self-learning
(Set U1.37)
Select suitable frequency source
(Set U0.03, U0.04, U0.07, etc)
Select motor start-up mode

(Set U6.00)
Select appropriate ac/deceleration time
(Set U0.17, U0.18)
Select motor stop mode

(Set U6.10)
Start motor to run, observe the phenomenon,
if abnor mal, please re fer to the troubleshooting.
NO Achieve the required control effe ct?
YES
End
37 38
Chapter 4 Commissioning Chapter 5 Function parameter
● Firstly confirm that AC input power supply voltage shall be within inverter Chapter 5 Function parameter
rated input voltage range before connecting power supply to the inverter.
● Connect power supply to the R, S and T terminals of the inverter. 5-1.Menu grouping
● Select the appropriate operation control method. Note:
“★”: In run status, the set value of the parameter can not be changed;
“●”: The actual measured value can not be changed;
“☆”: In stop and run statuses, both can be changed;
Chapter 5
Chapter 4
“▲”: "Factory parameters" , prohibit the user to operate;
“-” Indicates that the default factory value of the parameter is related to power or model, please see
the corresponding parameter description. for the specific value
Change limit refers to whether the parameters are adjustable.
UP.00 is used to set parameters protection password, you can enter into parameter
menu only after inputing correct password under function parameters mode and user
modified parameters mode Password protection is canceled when UP.00 is set to 0.
Parameter menu is not protected by password under user customized parameters
mode
U group and E group are the basic function parameters , D group is to monitoring
function parameters.
Reference
Code Parameter name Functional Description Quantity
page
d0 Monitoring Monitoring frequency, current, etc 36 41

function group
U0 Basic function Frequency setting, control mode, 25

group acceleration and deceleration time 44
U1 Motor parameters To set motor parameter 23 49
U2 Vector control Vector control parameters 10 51

parameters
U3 V/F control V/F control parameters 12 53

parameters
U4 Input terminals Analog and digital input functions 40 54

group
U5 Output terminals Analog and digital output 20 59

group functions
U6 Start and stop Start and stop control parameters 16 62

control group
39 40
Chapter 5 Function parameter Chapter 5 Function parameter
Reference Factory Reference

Code Parameter name Functional Description Quantity No. Code Parameter name Setting range
page setting page
Inverter output Effective value for actual 90

Keyboard and To set key and display function 4. d0.04 0.01A
U7 display parameters 13 64 current motor current
Motor output Calculated value for motor 90
To set Jog, jump frequency and 5. d0.05 0.1kW
U8 Auxiliary function 48 66 power output power
group other auxiliary function
parameters Motor output Motor output torque 90
6. d0.06 0.1%
Fault and To set fault and protection torque percentage
U9 protection parameters 57 71
7. d0.07 DI input status DI input status 1 91
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
UA PID function group To set Built-in PID parameters 29 78 8. d0.08 DO output status IO output status 1 91
Wobbulate, fixed- 9. d0.09 AI1 voltage (V) AI1 input voltage value 0.01V 91
Ub length and To set Wobbulate, fixed-length 10 81
counting and counting function parameters 10. d0.10 AI2 voltage (V) AI2 input voltage value 0.01V 91
Panel potentiometer Panel potentiometer 91
Multi-stage 11. d0.11 0.01V
UC command, simple Multi-speed setting, PLC 52 81 voltage voltage
PLC operation
Actual pulse count value in 91
12. d0.12 Count value 1
counting function
Ud Communication To set MODBUS communication 7 86
parameter group function Actual length in fixed length 91
13. d0.13 Length value 1
function
Function code To set password, parameter
UP management initialization and parameter group 5 87 Actual operating 91
display 14. d0.14 Motor actual running speed 1
speed
Torque control To set parameters under torque 9 88 Reference value percentage 91
E0 parameters control mode 15. d0.15 PID setting 1
when PID runs
Control Feedback value percentage 91
optimization To set parameters of optimizing 10 89 16. d0.16 PID feedback 1
E5 the control performance when PID runs
parameters
Stage display when PLC 91
17. d0.17 PLC stage 1
runs
5-1-1.d0 Group - Monitoring function group
High-speed pulse input
High-speed pulse
Factory Reference 18. d0.18 frequency display, unit: 0.01kHz 91
No. Code Parameter name Setting range input frequency
setting page 0.01Khz
0. d0.00 Running frequency Actual set frequency 0.01Hz 90 Feedback PG feedback speed, to an
19. d0.19 0.1Hz 91
speed(unit:0.1Hz) accuracy of 0.1hz
1. d0.01 Set frequency Actual output frequency 0.01Hz 90
Remaining run time
Detected value for DC bus 90 Remaining run
2. d0.02 DC bus voltage 0.1V 20. d0.20 display, it is for timing run 0.1Min 92
voltage time
control
Inverter output 90
3. d0.03 Actual output voltage 1V
voltage
41 42
Factory Reference Factory Reference

No. Code Parameter name Setting range No. Code Parameter name Setting range
setting page setting page
Linear speed calculated Display run, standby and

34. d0.61 Inverter status 1 92
from angular speed and other statuses
21. d0.24 Linear speed diameter is used for 1m/Min 92
controlling constant tension
and constant linear speed. 5-1-2.U0 Group - Basic function group
Current power-on Total time of current Parameter Factory Reference
22. d0.25 1Min 92 No. Code Setting range Change
time inverter power-on name setting page
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Total time of current
23. d0.26 Current run time 0.1Min 92
inverter run 35. 1.G type (constant torque load
Inverter
U0.00 type) - ● 93
High-speed pulse High-speed pulse input type
24. d0.27 1Hz 92 2.F type (fans/pumps load type)
input frequency frequency display, unit: 1hz
Frequency, torque or other 36. Motor 0.Vector control W/O PG
Communication set
25. d0.28 command values set by 0.01% 92 U0.01 control 1.Vector control W/ PG 2 ★ 93
value
communication port manner 2.V/F control
Encoder feedback PG feedback speed, to an
26. d0.29 0.01Hz 92
speed accuracy of 0.1hz
0.Keyboard control (LED off)
Frequency set by U0.03 37. Command 1.Terminal block control (LED
Master frequency U0.02 source on) 0 ☆ 93
27. d0.30 master frequency setting 0.01Hz 92
A display selection 2.Communications command
source
control (LED flashes)
Auxiliary Frequency set by U0.04
28. d0.31 frequency B auxiliary frequency setting 0.01Hz 92
display source 0: Keyboard set frequency
(U0.08, UP/DN can be
Synchro rotor Synchro rotor position modified, power-down without
29. d0.33 0.0° 92
position angle memory)
Observe the set command 1: Keyboard set frequency
Command torque (U0.08, UP/DN can be
30. d0.35 torque under the torque 0.1% 92
(%) modified, power-down with
control mode
Frequency memory)
Rotor position when rotary 38. 2: Analog AI1 setting
source
31. d0.36 Resolver position transformer is used as a 1 92 U0.03 3: Analog AI2 setting 0 93
master
speed feedback setting 4: Panel potentiometer setting
5: High-speed pulse setting
Position information
6: Multi-speed operation
calculated from when ABZ
32. d0.38 ABZ position 0.0 92 setting
incremental feedback
encoder is adopted 7: Simple PLC program setting
8: PID control setting
Encoder Z-phase signal 9: Remote communications
33. d0.58 Z signal counter 92
count setting
43 44
Parameter Factory Reference Parameter Factory Reference

No. Code Setting range Change No. Code Setting range Change
name setting page name setting page
0: Keyboard set frequency Units digit: frequency source

(U0.08, UP/DN can be selection
modified, power-down without 0: Frequency source master
memory) setting
1: Keyboard set frequency 1: Arithmetic result of master
(U0.08, UP/DN can be and auxiliary(arithmetic
modified, power-down with relationship depends on tens
Frequency memory) digit)
39.
source 2: analog AI1 setting 2: switch between frequency
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
U0.04 0 ★ 95
auxiliary 3: Analog AI2 setting source master setting and
setting 4: Panel potentiometer setting auxiliary setting
Frequency
5: High-speed pulse setting 3: switch between frequency
42. source
6: Multi-speed operation source master setting and
U0.07 superimpos 0 ☆ 96
setting arithmetic result of master and
ed
7: Simple PLC program setting auxiliary
selection
8: PID control setting 4: switch between frequency
9: Remote communications source auxiliary setting and
setting arithmetic result of master and
auxiliary
Reference Tens digit: arithmetic
object relationship of master and
selection 0. relative to maximum auxiliary for frequency source
40.
for frequency 0: master+auxiliary
U0.05
1.relative to master frequency
0 ☆ 96
frequency 1: master-auxiliary
source source A 2: Max(master, auxiliary)
auxiliary 3: Min (master, auxiliary)
setting
43. Keyboard
Frequency 0.00Hz to U0.10 (maximum 50.00H
U0.08 set ☆ 97
41. source frequency) z
frequency
U0.06 auxiliary 0% to 150% 100% ☆ 96
setting 44.
Running 0: same direction
range U0.09 0.00Hz ☆ 97
direction 1: opposite direction
45. Maximum
50.00H
U0.10 output 50.00Hz to 320.00Hz ★ 98
z
frequency
0: U0.12 setting
1: AI1
46. Upper limit
2: AI2
U0.11 frequency 3: Panel potentiometer setting 0 ★ 98
source
4: High-speed pulse setting
5: communications reference
45 46
Parameter Factory Reference Parameter Factory Reference

No. Code Setting range Change No. Code Setting range Change
name setting page name setting page
47.
Upper limit U0.14 (lower limit frequency) Shutdown
U0.12 50.00Hz ☆ 98 memory
frequency to U0.10 (maximum frequency) 57.
selection 0: W/O memory
U0.23 0 ☆ 100
Upper limit for digital 1: W/ memory
48.
0.00Hz to U0.10 (maximum set
U0.13 frequency 0.00Hz ☆ 98
frequency) frequency
offset
Lower Ac/deceler
49.
0.00Hz to U0.12 (lower limit 58. 0: U0.10(maximum frequency)
U0.14 limit 0.00Hz ☆ 98 ation time
U0.25 1: Set frequency 0 ★ 100
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
frequency) reference
frequency 2: 100Hz
frequency
50. Depend
Carrier Frequency
U0.15 0.5kHz to 16.0kHz s on ☆ 98
Frequency command
models
59. UP /
0: Running frequency
Carrier U0.26 DOWN 0 ★ 100
1: Set frequency
frequency reference
51.
adjustment 0: NO when
U0.16 1 ☆ 99
as per 1: YES running
temperatur
e Units digit: binding frequency
source selection for operation
52. Depend panel command
Acceleratio
U0.17 0.01s to 36000s s on ☆ 99 0: not binded
n time 1
models 1: keyboard set frequency
2: AI1
53. Depend 3: AI2
Deceleratio
U0.18 0.01s to 36000s s on ☆ 99 4: Panel potentiometer
n time 1
models Binding 5: High-speed pulse setting
54. Ac/Deceler 0:1 second 60. frequency 6: Multi-stage command
U0.19 ation time 1:0.1 second 1 ★ 99 U0.27 source for 7: Simple PLC 000 ☆ 101
unit 2:0.01 second command 8: PID
source 9: Communications reference
Frequency Tens digit: terminal command
source binding frequency source
55. offset selection (0 to 9, same as units
0.00Hz to U0.10(maximum
U0.21 frequency 0.00Hz ☆ 100 digit)
frequency)
when Hundreds digit: communication
superimpos command binding frequency
ing source selection (0 to 9, same
as units digit)
56. Frequency
1: 0.1Hz
U0.22 command 2 ★ 100
2: 0.01Hz
resolution
47 48
Factory Reference
No. Code Parameter name Setting range Change
5-1-3.U1 Group - First motor parameters setting page
Factory Reference 0.01mH to
setting page 655.35mH (inverter
69. Asynchronous Motor
U1.08 motor leakage power <= 55kW) ★ 102
0: general 0.001mH to parameters
asynchronous motor inductance
65.535mH (inverter
61.
Motor type 1: asynchronous power> 55kW)
U1.00 inverter motor 0 ★ 102
selection
2: permanent 0.1mH to 6553.5mH
magnet synchronous 70. Asynchronous (inverter power <=
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
motor 55kW) Motor
U1.09 motor mutual ★ 102
0.01mH to 655.35mH parameters
62. inductance
Depends on (inverter power>
U1.01 Rated power 0.1kW to 1000.0kW models ★ 102
55kW)
63.
0.01A to U1.03
Depends on (inverter power <=
U1.02 Rated voltage 1V to 2000V ★ 102 71. Asynchronous
models 55kW) Motor
U1.10 motor no-load ★ 102
0.1A to U1.03 parameters
current
0.01A to 655.35A (inverter power>
64.
(inverter power ≦ 55kW)
55kW) Depends on
U1.03 Rated current ★ 102
0.1A to 6553.5A models 0.001Ω to 65.535Ω
(inverter rate> (inverter power <=
72. Synchronous
55kW) U1.16 motor stator 55kW) - ★ 103
65. 0.01Hz to U0.10 resistance 0.0001Ω to 6.5535Ω
Depends (inverter power>
U1.04 Rated frequency (maximum ★ 102
frequency) on models 55kW)
66. Depends on 0.01mH to
U1.05 Rated speed 1rpm to 36000rpm ★ 102
models 655.35mH (inverter
73.
0.001Ω to 65.535Ω U1.17 Synchronous D- power <= 55kW) - ★ 103
axis inductance 0.001mH to
67. Asynchronous (inverter power <=
Motor 65.535mH (inverter
U1.06 motor stator 55kW) ★ 102
0.0001Ω to 6.5535Ω parameters power> 55kW)
resistance
(inverter power>
55kW) 0.01mH to
74. 655.35mH (inverter
0.001Ω to 65.535Ω Synchronous Q-
U1.18 power <= 55kW) - ★ 103
(inverter power <= axis inductance
68. Asynchronous 0.001mH to
55kW) Motor
U1.07 motor rotor ★ 102 65.535mH (inverter
0.0001Ω to 6.5535Ω parameters power> 55kW)
resistance
(inverter power>
55kW) 75.
U1.20 Synchronous 0.1V to 6553.5V 0.1 ★ 103
motor back-EMF
49 50

No. Code Parameter name Setting range Change No. Code Parameter name Setting range Change
0: ABZ incremental 84. U2.00 Speed loop low low P 1 to 100 30 ☆ 106
encoder
1: UVW 85.
U2.01 Speed loop low 0.01s to 10.00s 0.50 ☆ 106
76.
incremental encoder integral time
U1.28 Encoder type 2: Rotational 0.00 ★ 103
transformer 86.
U2.02 Speed loop low 0.00 to U2.05 5.00Hz ☆ 106
3: Sine and cosine switching frequency
encoder
4: Wire-saving 87. U2.03 Speed loop high P 0 to 100 20 ☆ 106
UVW encoder 88. ☆ 106
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Speed loop high
77. ABZ incremental U2.04 0.01s to 10.00s 1.00s
integral time
U1.30 encoder AB phase 0: forward 0 ★ 104
1: reverse
sequence 89. ☆ 106
Speed loop high U2.02 to U0.10
U2.05 10.00Hz
78.
U1.31 Encoder 0.00 to 359.90 0.00 ★ 104 switching frequency (max.frequency)
installation angle
90.
Vector control
79.
U1.32 UVW encoder 0: forward 0 ★ 104 U2.06 50% to 200% 100% ☆ 107
UVW phase 1: reverse differential gain
80.
U1.33 UVW encoder 0.00 to 359.90 0.0 ★ 104 91.
Speed loop filter time
offset angle U2.07 0.000s to 0.100s 0.000s ☆ 107
constant
81.
U1.34 Pole-pairs of 1 to 65535 1 ★ 104
rotary transformer 92.
Vector control
U2.08 0 to 200 64 ☆ 107
82.
U1.36 peed feedback PG 0.0s: OFF 0.1s to 0 ★ 104 overexcitation gain
disconnection 10.0s
0: no operation
0: no operation 0: function code
1: asynchronous U2.10 setting
motor parameters 1: AI1
still auto tunning 2: AI2
2: asynchronous 3: Panel
motor parameters potentiometer setting
83.
Motor parameter comprehensive auto Torque limit source 4: High-speed pulse
U1.37 tunning 0 ★ 104 93.
auto tunning U2.09 under speed control setting 0 ☆ 107
11: synchronous
motor parameters mode 5: Communications
still auto tunning reference
12: synchronous 6: Min (AI1, AI2)
motor parameters 7: Max (AI1, AI2)
comprehensive auto
tunning options 1-7 full scale
correspondence
U2.10
5-1-4.U2 Group - Vector control parameters Upper limit digital

94.
setting for lower
Factory Reference U2.10 0.0% to 200.0% 150.0% ☆ 107
No. Code Parameter name Setting range Change torque under speed
setting page control mode
51 52

95. Excitation regulator 107. VF voltage point

U2.13 0 to 60000 2000 ☆ 108 U3.08 0.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ★ 110
proportional gain 3
96. Excitation regulator 108. Slip compensation
U2.14 0 to 60000 1300 ☆ 108 U3.09 0% to 200.0% 0.0% ☆ 110
integral gain coefficient
97. Torque regulator 109. Overexcitation
U2.15 0 to 60000 2000 ☆ 108 U3.10 0 to 200 64 ☆ 110
proportional gain gain
98. Torque regulator 110. Oscillation
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
U2.16 0 to 60000 1300 ☆ 108 U3.11 0 to 100 0 ☆ 111
integral gain suppression gain
5-1-5.U3 Group - V/F control parameters 5-1-6.U4 Gruop - Input terminals group
0: linear V/F 111.

DI1 terminal 0: No function
U4.00 1 ★ 111
1: multi-point V/F function selection 1: Forward run
99. 2: square V/F 2: Reverse run
U3.00 V/F curve setting 3:1.2th power V/F 0 ★ 108 112. DI2 terminal 3: Three-wire operation
U4.01 2 ★ 111
4:1.4th power V/F function selection control
6:1.6th power V/F 4: Forward Jog
8:1.8th power V/F 113. DI3 terminal 5: Reverse Jog
U4.02 8 ★ 111
function selection 6: Terminal UP
100. 0.0%(Automatic 7: Terminal DN
U3.01 Torque boost 10 ★ 109 114.
torque boost) DI4 terminal 8: Free stop
U4.03 9 ★ 111
function selection 9: Fault reset (RESET)
101. Torque boost cut- 0.00Hz to U0.10 10: Run pausing
U3.02 (maximum 15.00Hz ★ 109 115.
off frequency DI5 terminal
U4.04 11: External fault 12 ★ 111
frequency) function selection normally open input
102. VF frequency
U3.03 0.00Hz to U3.05 0.00Hz ★ 109 116. 12: Multi-stage
point 1 DI6 terminal
U4.05 command terminal 1 13 ★ 111
function selection
103. VF voltage point 13: Multi-stage
U3.04 0.0% to 100.0% 0.0 ★ 109 117. command terminal 2
1 DI7 terminal
U4.06 2 ★ 111
function selection 14: Multi-stage
104. VF frequency command terminal 3
U3.05 U3.03 to U3.07 0.00Hz ★ 109 118.
point 2 U4.07 DI8 terminal 15: Multi-stage 0 ★ 111
function selection command terminal 4
105. VF voltage point
U3.06 0.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ★ 109 16: Ac/deceleration time
2 119. DI9 terminal
U4.08 selection terminal 1 0 ★ 111
function selection 17: Ac/deceleration time
106. VF frequency U3.05 to U1.04 (rated
U3.07 0.00Hz ★ 110 120. selection terminal 2
point 3 motor frequency) DI10 terminal
U4.09 18: Frequency source 0 ★ 111
function selection switching
53 54

19: Clear UP/DN setting 44: Custom fault 1
(terminal, keyboard) 45: Custom fault 2
20: Run command 46 Speed control / torque
switch terminal control switching
21: Ac/deceleration 47: Emergency parking
prohibited 48: External parking
22: PID pause terminal 2
23: PLC status reset 49: Deceleration DC
24: Wobbulate pause braking
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
25: Counter input 50: Clear current running
26: Counter reset time
27: Counter length count
input 121. U4.10 DI filter time 0.000s to 1.000s 0.01s ☆ 117
28: Length reset 0: Two-wire type 1
29: Torque control 122.
Terminal 1: Two-wire type 2
prohibited U4.11 0 ★ 117
command mode 2: Three-wire type 1
30: High-speed pulse 3: Three-wire type 2
input (only valid for
DI5 ) 123. Terminal UP /
31: Reserved U4.12 DOWN change 0.001Hz/s to 50.000Hz/s 1.00 ☆ 120
32: Immediately DC rate
braking
33: External fault 124. Minimum input
normally closed input U4.13 value for AI curve 0.00V to U4.15 0.00V ☆ 120
34: Frequency change 1
enable
35: PID action direction 125. Minimum input
as reverse
U4.14 setting for AI curve -100.00% to +100.0% 0.0% ☆ 120
36: External parking 1
terminal 1 126.
37: Control command Maximum input
U4.15 U4.13 to +10.00V 10.00V ☆ 120
switch terminal 2 for AI curve 1
38: PID integral pause
39: Switch between 127. Maximum input
frequency source master U4.16 setting for AI curve -100.00% to +100.0% 100.0% ☆ 120
setting and preset 1
frequency
40: Switch between 128. U4.17 AI1 filter time 0.00s to 10.00s 0.10s ☆ 120
frequency source 129. Minimum input
auxiliary setting and U4.18 value for AI curve 0.00V to U4.20 0.00V ☆ 121
preset frequency 2
41: Reserved
42: Reserved 130. Minimum input
43: PID parameter U4.19 setting for AI curve -100.00% to +100.0% 0.0% ☆ 121
switching 2
55 56

131. Maximum input 1: curve 1 (see U4.13 to
U4.20 U4.18 to +10.00V 10.00V ☆ 121 U4.16)
for AI curve 2
2: curve 2 (see U4.18 to
132. Maximum input U4.21)
U4.21 setting for AI curve -100.00% to +100.0% 100.0% ☆ 121
3: curve 3 (see U4.23 to
2 U4.26)
133. U4.22 AI2 filter time 122 Tens digit: AI2 curve
0.00s to 10.00s 0.10s ☆
selection
134. Minimum input
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
U4.23 value for AI curve -10.00V to U4.25 0.00V ☆ 122
Units digit: setting
3 selection for AI1 less
135. Minimum input than minimum input
U4.24 setting for AI curve -100.00% to +100.0% 0.0% ☆ 122 0: the corresponding
3 145. Setting selection minimum input setting
U4.34 for AI less than 0x0000 ☆ 123
136.
Maximum input minimum input 1: 0.0%
U4.25 U4.23 to +10.00V 10.00V ☆ 122 Tens digit: setting
for AI curve 3
selection for AI2 less
137.
than minimum input,
Maximum input
U4.26 setting for AI curve -100.00% to +100.0% 100.0% ☆ 122 ditto
3 146. U4.35 DI1 delay time 123
0.0s to 3600.0s 0.0s ★
138. Filtering time of
147. U4.36 DI2 delay time 0.0s to 3600.0s 0.0s ★ 124
U4.27 panel 0.00s to 10.00s 0.10s ☆ 122
potentiometer 148. U4.37 DI3 delay time 124
0.0s to 3600.0s 0.0s ★
139. Minimum pulse Units digit: DI1
U4.28 0.00kHz to U4.30 0.00 ☆ 122
input frequency 0: high level active
149.
1: low level active
140. Minimum pulse DI terminal valid
U4.29 input frequency -100.00% to +100.0% 0.0% ☆ 122 U4.38 Tens digit: DI2 0 ★ 124
mode selection 1
setting Hundreds digit: DI3
Thousands digit: DI4
141.
U4.30 Maximum pulse U4.28 to 100.00kHz 50.00 ☆ 122 Ten thousands digit: DI5
input frequency
142. Maximum pulse Units digit: DI6

U4.31 input frequency -100.00% to +100.0% 100.0% ☆ 122 0: high level active
setting 1: low level active
150.
DI terminal valid Tens digit: DI7
143.
U4.32 Filter time of pulse 0.00s to 10.00s
U4.39 0 ★ 124
0.1 ☆ 122 mode selection 2
input Hundreds digit: DI8
144.
Thousands digit: DI9
Units digit: AI1 curve
U4.33 AI curve selection 0x0321 ☆ 122 Ten thousands digit:
selection DI10
57 58
Factory Reference
setting page
5-1-7.U5 Group - Output terminals group
completed (reserved)
Factory Reference
No. Code Parameter name Setting range Change 22: Positioning
setting page
approached (reserved)
0: High-speed pulse 23: Zero speed running
151. SPB terminal 2 (shutdown with
output
U5.00 output mode 0 ☆ 125 output)
1: switching quantity
selection 24; Accumulated power-
output
on time arrival
152. Switching quantity 0: No output 25: Frequency level
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
U5.01 output function 1: Inverter in service 0 ☆ 125 detection FDT2 output
selection 2: Fault output (fault 26: Frequency 1 reaches
shutdown) output value
153. Relay 1 output 3: Frequency level 27: Frequency 2 reaches
U5.02 function selection detection FDT1 output 2 ☆ 125 output value
(TA1.TB1.TC1) 4: Frequency arrival 28: Current 1 reaches
5: Zero speed running output value
154.
(shutdown without 29: Current 2 reaches
U5.03 Undefined output) 0 ☆ 125
output value
6: Motor overload pre- 30: Timer reaches output
SPA output alarm value
155. function selection 7: Inverter overload pre- 31: AI1 input exceed
U5.04 (collector Open alarm 1 ☆ 125 limit
circuit output 8. Set count value 32: Load droping
terminals) arrival 33: Reverse running
9. Specified count value 34: Zero current status
arrival 35: Module temperature
10: Length arrival arrival
11: PLC cycle 36: Output current
completed exceed limit
12: Cumulative running 37: Lower limit
time arrival frequency arrival(stop
13: Frequency being with output)
limited 38: Alarm output
14: Torque being limited (continued running)
156. Relay 2 output 15: Ready for operation 39: Motor
U5.05 function selection 16: AI1> AI2 4 ☆ 125
overtemperature pre-
(TA2.TB2.TC2) 17: Upper limit alarm
frequency arrival 40: Current running time
18: Lower limit arrival
frequency arrival 41: Reserved
19: Undervoltage status
output 157. High-speed pulse 0: Running frequency
20: Communications U5.06 output function 1: Set frequency 0 ☆ 128
setting selection 2: Output current
21: Positioning
59 60

158. DA1 output 3: Output torque 166.

Relay 1 output 0.0s to 3600.0s
U5.07 function selection 4: Output power 0 ☆ 128 U5.18 0.0s ☆ 129
delay time
5: Output voltage
6: High-speed pulse 167.
input (100.0% Expansion card DO 0.0s to 3600.0s
U5.19 0.0s ☆ 129
corresponds to output delay time
100.0kHz)
7: AI1 168. 0.0s to 3600.0s
SPA output delay
8: AI2 U5.20 0.0s ☆ 129
time
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
DA2 output function
9: Reserved
selection
10: Length 169. 0.0s to 3600.0s
Relay 2 output
11: Count value U5.21 0.0s ☆ 129
delay time
12: Communications
159. setting
U5.08 13: Motor speed 1 ☆ 128 0: positive logic
14: Output current 1: anti-logic
(inverter power ≦ Units digit: SPB
55kW, 100.0% switching quantity
correspond to 100A; 170. DO output terminal
Tens digit: Relay 1
inverter rate> 55kW, U5.22 active status 0.0% ☆ 129
selection Hundreds digit:
100.0% corresponds to
Expansion DO
1000A)
15: DC bus voltage Thousands digit: SPA
(100.0% corresponding Ten thousands digit:
1000.0V) Relay 2
160. Maximum output 0.01kHz to 100.00kHz 5-1-8.U6 Group - Start and stop control group
U5.09 frequency of high- 50.00 ☆ 129
speed pulse Factory Reference
setting page
161. DA1 zero bias -100.0% to +100.0%
U5.10 0.0% ☆ 129 0: Direct startup
coefficient
1: Speed tracking
171.
162. restart
U5.11 DA1 gain -10.00 to +10.00 1.00 ☆ 129 U6.00 Start-up mode 0 ☆ 130
2: Pre-excitation start
163. -100.0% to +100.0% (AC asynchronous
DA2 zero bias
U5.12 0.00% ☆ 129 motor)
coefficient
0: start from stop
164. U5.13 DA2 gain 129
-10.00 to +10.00 1.00 ☆ frequency
172.
Speed tracking 1: start from zero
165. SPB switching 0.0s to 3600.0s U6.01 0 ★ 131
mode speed
U5.17 quantity output 0.0s ☆ 129
delay time 2: start from
maximum frequency
61 62

173. 185.
Speed tracking Stop DC braking
U6.02 1 to 100 20 ☆ 131 U6.14 0.0s to 100.0s 0.0s ☆ 134
value time
174. U6.03 Start frequency 0.00Hz to 10.00Hz 131 186.

0.00Hz ☆ Braking utilization
U6.15 0% to 100% 100% ☆ 135
175. rate
Hold time for start
U6.04 0.0s to 100.0s 0.0s ★ 131
frequency
5-1-9.U7 Group - Keyboard and display
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
176. Factory Reference
Start DC braking No. Code Parameter name Setting range Change
U6.05 0% to 100% 0% ★ 131 setting page
current
177.
0: STOP/RES key is
Start DC braking enabled only under
U6.06 0.0s to 100.0s 0.0s ★ 132
time 187. keyboard operation
STOP/RESET key
U7.00 mode 1 ☆ 135
functions
Ac/deceleration 0: Linear acceleration 1: STOP/RES key is
mode and deceleration enabled under any
1: S curve operation mode
178.
acceleration and
U6.07 0 ★ 132 0 0 0 0 to FFFF
deceleration A Bit00: running
2: S curve frequency 1 (Hz)
acceleration and Bit01: set frequency
deceleration B (Hz)
Bit02: bus voltage (V)
179.
Proportion of S 0.0% to (100.0%.to Bit03: output voltage
U6.08 30.0% ★ 132
(V)
curve start-section U6.09)
Bit04: output current
180.
Proportion of S 0.0% to (100.0%. to (A)
U6.09 30.0% ★ 132 Bit05: output power
curve end-section U6.08)
188. Running status (kW)
U7.01 display Bit06: Output torque 1F ☆ 135
181. 0: Deceleration parameters 1 (%)
U6.10 Stop mode parking 0 ☆ 133 Bit07: DI input status
1: Free stop Bit08: DO output status
Bit09: AI1 voltage (V)
182. 0.00Hz to U0.10
Initial frequency of Bit10: AI2 voltage (V)
U6.11 (maximum 0.00Hz ☆ 134
stop DC braking Bit11: panel
frequency)
potentiometer voltage
183. Bit12: count value
Waiting time of stop
U6.12 0.0s to 100.0s 0.0s ☆ 134 Bit13: length value
DC braking
Bit14: load speed
display
184.
Stop DC braking Bit15: PID setting
U6.13 0% to 100% 0% ☆ 134
current
63 64

0 0 0 0 to FFFF Bit07: count value

Bit00: PID feedback Bit08: length value
Bit01: PLC stage Bit09: PLC stage
Bit02: high-speed pulse Bit10: load speed
input frequency (kHz) Bit11: PID setting
Bit03: running Bit12: high-speed pulse
frequency 2 (Hz) input frequency (kHz)
Bit04: remaining run
time 191.
Load speed 0.0001 to 6.5000
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
U7.04 1.0000 ☆ 136
Bit05: AI1 voltage display coefficient
before correction (V)
Bit06: AI2 voltage after 192. Inverter module 0.0℃ to 100.0℃
correction (V) U7.05 radiator 0 ● 136
Bit07: panel temperature
potentiometer voltage
189. Running status
before correction (V) 193. 0h to 65535h
U7.02 display 0 ☆ 135
U7.07 Total run time 0 ● 137
Bit08: linear speed
parameters 2
Bit09: current power-on
time (Hour) 194.
Bit10: current running U7.08 Part number - ● 137
time (Min)
Bit11: high-speed pulse
input frequency (Hz) 195.
Software version
Bit12: communication U7.09 - ● 137
number
set value
Bit13: encoder feedback 0:0 decimal places 1
speed (Hz) 196. Decimal places
1:1 decimal places
Bit14: master frequency U7.10 for load speed ● 137
2:2 decimal places
A display (Hz) display
3:3 decimal places
Bit15: auxiliary
frequency B display 197.
Total power-on 0h to 65535h
(Hz) U7.11 - ● 137
time
0000 to FFFF
198.
Total power 0 to 65535 kwh
Bit00: set frequency U7.12 - ● 137
(Hz) consumption
Bit01: bus voltage (V)
Bit02: DI terminal input 5-1-10.U8 Group - Auxiliary function group
190. Stop status
status
U7.03 display 33 ☆ 136 Factory Reference
Bit03: DO output status No. Code Parameter name Setting range Change
parameters setting page
Bit06: panel 0.00Hz to U0.10 137
potentiometer voltage 199. U8.00 Jog running frequency (maximum 2.00Hz ☆
(V) frequency)
65 66

200. U8.01 Jog acceleration time 0.1s to 3600.0s 20.0s ☆ 138 0: running at 139
lower limit ☆
Set frequency lower
201. U8.02 Jog deceleration time 0.1s to 3600.0s 20.0s ☆ 138 frequency
213. U8.14 than lower limit 0
1: stop
frequency mode
Depends 138 2: zero speed
202. U8.03 Acceleration time 2 0.1s to 3600.0s on ☆ running
models
0.00Hz to 139
214. U8.15 Droop control 0.00Hz ☆
10.00Hz
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Depends 138
203. U8.04 Deceleration time 2 0.1s to 3600.0s on ☆ Setting cumulative 139
models 215. U8.16 0h to 36000h 0h ☆
power-on arrival time
Depends 138 Setting cumulative 139
204. U8.05 Acceleration time 3 0.1s to 3600.0s on ☆ 216. U8.17 0h to 36000h 0h ☆
running arrival time
models
0: OFF 140
Depends 138 217. U8.18 Start protection 0 ☆
1: ON
205. U8.06 Deceleration time 3 0.1s to 3600.0s on ☆
models 0.00Hz to U0.10 140
Frequency detection
218. U8.19 (maximum 50.00Hz ☆
value (FDT1)
Depends 138 frequency)
206. U8.07 Acceleration time 4 0.1s to 3600.0s on ☆
Frequency detection 0.0% to 100.0% 140
models 219. U8.20 5.0% ☆
hysteresis value (FDT1) (FDT1 level)
Depends 138 0.00 to 100%
Frequency reaches 141
207. U8.08 Deceleration time 4 0.1s to 3600.0s on ☆ 220. U8.21 (maximum 0.0% ☆
models detection width
frequency)
0.00Hz to U0.10 138 Jump frequency 141
U8.09 Jump frequency 1 (maximum 0.00Hz ☆ 0: Invalid
208. 221. U8.22 availability during 0 ☆
frequency) 1: Valid
ac/deceleration process
0.00Hz to U0.10 138 Switching frequency 0.00Hz to U0.10 142
209. U8.10 Jump frequency 2 (maximum 0.00Hz ☆ point between (maximum
frequency) 222. U8.25 frequency) 0.00Hz ☆
acceleration time 1 and
0.00Hz to U0.10 acceleration time 2
138
210. U8.11 Jump frequency range (maximum 0.00Hz ☆
frequency) Switching frequency 0.00Hz to U0.10 142
point between (maximum
223. U8.26 frequency) 0.00Hz ☆
Forward/reverse 138 deceleration time 1 and
211. U8.12 0.00s to 3600.0s 0.0s ☆ deceleration time 2
rotation deadband
0: Enable 138 0:Invalid 142

212. U8.13 Reverse rotation control 0 224. U8.27 Terminal jog priority 0 ☆
1: Disable ☆ 1: Valid
67 68

0.00Hz to U0.10 142 current)

Frequency detection
225. U8.28 (maximum 50.00Hz ☆
value (FDT2) 0.0% to 300.0% 144
frequency) Random arrivals current
237. U8.40 (rated motor 1000 ☆
2
Frequency detection 0.0% to 100.0% 142 current)
226. U8.29 5.0% ☆
hysteresis value (FDT2) (FDT2 level) 0.0% to 300.0%
Random arrivals current 144
238. U8.41 (rated motor 0.0% ☆
Random arrivals 0.00Hz to U0.10 142 2 width
current)
227. U8.30 frequency detection (maximum 50.00Hz ☆
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
value 1 frequency) Timing function 0: Invalid 1: 145
239. U8.42 0 ☆
selection Valid
Random arrivals 0.00% to 100.0% 142
0: U8.44 setting 145
228. U8.31 frequency detection (maximum 0.0% ☆
1: AI1
width 1 frequency)
2: AI2
3: Panel
Random arrivals 0.00Hz to U0.10 142 Timing run time potentiometer 0
229. U8.32 frequency detection (maximum 50.00Hz ☆ 240. U8.43 ☆
selection Analog input
value 2 frequency) range
corresponds to
Random arrivals 0.00% to 100.0% 143 U8.44
230. U8.33 frequency detection (maximum 0.0% ☆
width 2 frequency)
0.0Min to 145
241. U8.44 Timing run time 0.0Min ☆
0.0% to 300.0% 143 3600.0Min
Zero current detection
231. U8.34 (rated motor 5.0% ☆
level AI1 input voltage 145
current) 242. U8.45 0.00V to U8.46 3.1 ☆
protection lower limit
Zero current detection 143
232. U8.35 0.01s to 360.00s 0.10s ☆ AI1 input voltage 6.8 ☆ 145
delay time 243. U8.46 U8.45 to 10.00V
protection upper limit
0.0% (not 144
detected) Module temperature 145
Overrun value of output 244. U8.47 0℃ to 100℃ 75℃ ☆
233. U8.36 0.1% to 300.0% 200.0% ☆ arrival
current
(rated motor
current) 0: Fan running 145
only when
Output Current overrun 0.00s to 360.00s 144 245. U8.48 Cooling fan control running 0 ☆
234. U8.37 0.00s ☆ 1: Fan always
detection delay time
running
0.0% to 300.0% 144
Random arrivals current
235. U8.38 (rated motor 1000 ☆ 246. U8.53
Current running reaches 0.0Min to
0.0Min ☆
146
1 the set time. 3600.0Min
current)
Random arrivals current 0.0% to 300.0% 144

236. U8.39 0.0% ☆
1 width (rated motor
69 70
Factory Reference
setting page
5-1-11.U9 Group - Fault and protection
257. 148
Factory Reference Automatic fault
No. Code Parameter name Setting range Change U9.11 0.1s to 100.0s 1.0s ☆
setting page reset interval
247. 146
Motor overload 0: Disable 258. Input phase loss 148
U9.00 1 ☆ 0: Disable
protection 1: Enable U9.12 protection 1 ☆
1: Enable
selection
248. 146
Motor overload
U9.01 0.20 to 10.00 1 ☆ 259. Output phase loss 148
protection gain
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
0: Disable
U9.13 protection 1 ●
1: Enable
selection
249. Motor overload 146
U9.02 pre-alarm 50% to 100% 80% ☆ 260. 0: No fault
coefficient Type of the first 148
U9.14 1: Reserved - ●
fault
2: Acceleration
250. 146
Overvoltage stall overcurrent
U9.03 0 to 100 0 ☆ 261.
Type of the second 3: Deceleration 148
gain U9.15 - ●
fault overcurrent
Overvoltage stall 147 4: Constant speed
251. protection voltage / overcurrent 148
U9.04 energy 120% to 150% 130% ☆ 5: Acceleration
consumption brake overvoltage
voltage 6: Deceleration
overvoltage
252. 147 7: Constant speed
Overcurrent stall
U9.05 0 to 100 20 ☆ overvoltage
gain
8: Reserved
253. 9: Undervoltage
Overcurrent stall 147
U9.06 100% to 200% 150% ☆ 10: Inverter overload
protection current 11: Motor Overload
12: Input phase loss
254. 262.
Power-on short 0:Invalid 147 Type of the third(at 13: Output phase loss
U9.07 1 ☆ U9.16 - ●
circuit to ground 1: Valid last) fault 14: Module
overheating
255. Number of 147 15: External fault
U9.09 automatic fault 0 to 20 0 ☆ 16: Communication
reset abnormal
17: Contactor
Fault DO action 148 abnormal
256.
selection during 0: OFF 18: Current detection
U9.10 0 ☆ abnormal
automatic fault 1: ON
reset 19: Motor tuning
abnormal
20: Reserved
21: Parameter read and
71 72

write abnormal 269. Power-on time of 150

22: Inverter hardware U9.23 the third(at last) - ●
abnormal fault
23: Motor short to
ground 270. Running time of ● 150
24: Reserved U9.24 the third(at last) -
25: Reserved fault
26: Running time 271.
Frequency of the 150
arrival U9.27 - ●
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
27: Custom fault 1 second fault
28: Custom fault 2
272. 151
29; Power-on time Current of the
U9.28 - ●
arrival second fault
30: Load drop
31: PID feedback loss 273.
Bus voltage of the ● 151
when running U9.29 -
second fault
40: Fast current
limiting timeout Input terminal
274. 151
41: Reserved U9.30 status of the - ●
42: Too large speed second fault
deviation
43: Motor overspeed 275. Output terminal 151
U9.31 status of the - ●
263. 150
Frequency of the second fault
U9.17 - ☆
third(at last) fault
276. 151
Inverter status of
U9.32 - ●
264.
Current of the 150 the second fault
U9.18 - ●
277. 151
Power-on time of
U9.33 - ●
265.
Bus voltage of the 150 the second fault
U9.19 - ●
278. 151
Running time of
U9.34 - ●
266. Input terminal ● 150 the second fault
U9.20 status of the -
third(at last) fault 279. 151
Frequency of the
U9.37 - ●
first fault
267. Output terminal 150
U9.21 status of the - ●
280. 151
third(at last) fault Current of the first
U9.38 - ●
fault
268. Inverter status of 150
U9.22 the third(at last) - ● 281. 151
Bus voltage of the
fault U9.39 - ●
first fault
73 74

282. Input terminal 151 Thousands digit:

U9.40 status of the first - ● Motor overheating (25)
fault
Units digit: Custom 153
283. Output terminal 151 fault 1(27)
U9.41 status of the first - ●
0: Free stop
fault
1: Stop at the selected
284. 152 mode
Inverter status of
U9.42 - ●
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
2: Continue to run
the first fault
Tens digit: Custom
fault 2 (28)
285. 152
Power-on time of 0: Free stop
U9.43 - ●
the first fault 1: Stop at the selected
mode
286. 152 2: Continue to run
Running time of
U9.44 - ● Hundreds digit; Power-
the first fault
on time arrival (29)
Units digit: Motor 152 0: Free stop
overload (11) 1: Stop at the selected
0: Free stop mode
1: Stop at the selected 2: Continue to run
289.
mode Fault protection Thousands digit: Load
287.
U9.49 0 ☆
Fault protection 2: Continue to run action selection 3 drop (30)
U9.47 0 ● 0: Free stop
action selection 1 Tens digit: input phase
loss (12) 1: Deceleration
Hundred digit: output parking
phase loss (13) 2: Deceleration up to
Thousand digit: 7% of the rated motor
external fault (15) frequency, and then
continue running,
Units digit: 152 automatically restore
encoder/PG card to the set frequency for
abnormal (20) when the load drop
does not happen.
0: Free stop Ten thousands digit:
Tens digit: function PID feedback loss
288.
Fault protection code read and write ☆ when running (31)
U9.48 0 0: Free stop
action selection 2 abnormal (21)
1: Stop at the selected
0: Free stop mode
1: Stop at the selected 2: Continue to run
mode
290. Units digit: Too large 153
Hundreds digit: Fault protection
U9.50 speed deviation (42) 0 ☆
action selection 4
Reserved 0: Free stop
75 76

1: Stop at the selected 298.

Load drop 156
mode U9.64 0.0 to 100.0％ 10% ☆
detection level
2: Continue to run
Tens digit: Motor 299.
overspeed (43) Load drop 156
U9.65 0.0 to 60.0s 1 ☆
Hundreds digit: Initial detection level
position error (51)
300. 156
Overspeed 0.0 to 50.0%
0: running at current 0 ☆ 154 U9.67 20% ☆
detection value (maximum frequency)
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
frequency
1: running at set
301. 156
Continue running frequency Overspeed
291. U9.68 0.0 to 60.0s 1 ☆
frequency selection 2: running at upper detection time
U9.54
when failure limit frequency
happens 3: running at lower 302. Detection value for 156
0.0 to 50.0%
limit frequency U9.69 too large speed 20% ☆
4: running at abnormal (maximum frequency)
deviation
spare frequency
303. Detection time for 156
60.0% to 100.0% 154
292.
Abnormal spare (100.0% corresponds
U9.70 too large speed 0.0 to 60.0s 5 ☆
U9.55 100 ☆ deviation
frequency to maximum frequency
U0.10)
5-1-12.UA Group - PID function
0: Invalid 154
293.
Momentary power 1: Deceleration Factory Reference
U9.59 0 ☆ No. Code Parameter name Setting range Change
cut action selection 2: Deceleration and setting page
stop 0: UA.01 setting
1: Analog AI1
Recovery 90 154
294. reference
judgment voltage %
U9.60 80.0% to 100.0% ☆ 2: Analog AI2
of momentary
reference
power cut
304. 3: Panel
UA.00 PID setting source potentiometer setting 0 ☆ 157
Recovery voltage 154
295. 4: High-speed pulse
judgment time of
U9.61 0.00s to 100.00s 0.5 ☆ setting
momentary power
5: Communications
cut reference
6: Multi-stage
296. Judgment voltage 155 command reference
60.0% to 100.0%
U9.62 of momentary 80% ☆
(standard bus voltage)
power cut action 305. UA.01 PID keyboard setting 0.0% to 100.0% 50.0% ☆ 158
306. 0: AI1
297. Load drop 156
U9.63 protection
0: Invalid
0 ☆
UA.02 PID feedback source 1: AI2 0 ☆ 158
1: Valid 2: Panel
selection
77 78

potentiometer setting 0: no switching

3: AI1－AI2 1: switching via
321.
4: High-speed pulse PID parameter terminals
UA.18 0 ☆ 160
setting switching conditions 2: automatically
5: Communications switching according
setting to deviation.
6: AI1+AI2
322. PID parameter
7: MAX(|AI1|, |AI2|) UA.19 0.0% to UA.20 20.0% ☆ 160
8: MIN (|AI1|, |AI2|) switching deviation 1
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
307. 0: positive 323. PID parameter
UA.03 PID action direction 1: negative 0 ☆ 158 UA.20 UA.19 to 100.0% 80.0% ☆ 160
switching deviation 2
308. 324. UA.21 PID initial value 0.0% to 100.0% 161

UA.04
PID setting feedback
0 to 65535 1000 ☆ 158 0.0% ☆
range 325.
UA.22 PID initial value hold 0.00s to 360.00s 0.00s ☆ 161
309. Proportional gain time
UA.05 0.0 to 100.0 20.0 ☆ 158
KP1 Maximum deviation
326.
310. UA.06 Integration time Ti1 0.01s to 10.00s 158 UA.23 of twice 0.00% to 100.00% 1.00% ☆ 161
2.00s ☆ outputs(forward)
311. UA.07 Differential time Td1 0.00s to 10.000s 0.000s ☆ 158
327. Maximum deviation
312. 0． 00 to UA.24 of twice 0.00% to 100.00% 1.00% ☆ 161
PID inversion cutoff
UA.08 U0.10(maximum 0.00Hz ☆ 159 outputs(backward)
frequency
frequency)
Units digit: integral
313. UA.09 PID deviation limit 0.0% to 100.0% 0 ☆ 159
separation
314. PID differential 0: Invalid
UA.10 0． 00% to 100.00% 0.10% ☆ 159 328. 1: Valid
limiting PID integral
UA.25 Tens digit: whether 00 ☆ 161
properties
315. PID reference change stop integration when
UA.11 0.00s to 650.00s 0.00s ☆ 159 output reaches limit
time
0: continue
316. PID feedback filter 1: stop
UA.12 0.00s to 60.00s 0.00s ☆ 159
time 329. 0.0%: not judged
PID feedback loss
UA.26 feedback loss 0.0% ☆ 162
317. UA.13 PID output filter time 0.00s to 60.00s 0.00s ☆ 159 detection value
0.1% to 100.0%
318.
UA.15 Proportional gain 0.0 to 100.0 20.0 ☆ 159 330.
UA.27 PID feedback loss 0.0s to 20.0s 0.0s ☆ 162
KP2 detection time
319. UA.16 Integration time Ti2 0.01s to 10.00s 2.00s ☆ 160 0: stop without
331.
320. Computing status computing
UA.28 0 ☆ 162
UA.17 Differential time Td2 0.00 to 10.000 0.000s ☆ 160 after PID stop 1: stop with
computing
79 80
5-1-13.Ub Group - Wobbulate, fixed-length and counting

Factory Reference
Factory Reference setting page
setting page
343. 1-stage speed 165
0: relative to center UC.01 -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
332. setting 1X
Swing setting frequency
Ub.00 0 ☆ 163
manner 1: relative to 344.
maximum frequency UC.02 2-stage speed -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆ 165
setting 2X
333. 345.
Ub.01 Wobbulate range 0.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆ 163 UC.03 3-stage speed -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆ 165
setting 3X
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
346.
334.
Sudden jump UC.04 4-stage speed -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆ 165
Ub.02 0.0% to 50.0% 0.0% ☆ 163 setting 4X
frequency range
347.
335.
UC.05 5-stage speed -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆ 165
setting 5X
Ub.03 Wobbulate cycle 0.1s to 3000.0s 10.0s ☆ 164
348.
UC.06 6-stage speed -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆ 165
336.
setting 6X
Triangle wave rise
Ub.04 0.1% to 100.0% 50.0% ☆ 164 349.
time coefficient UC.07 7-stage speed -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆ 165
setting 7X
337.
350. ☆ 165
Ub.05 Set length 0m to 65535m 1000m ☆ 164 UC.08 8-stage speed -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0%
setting 8X
338. 351. ☆ 165
UC.09 9-stage speed -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0%
Ub.06 Actual length 0m to 65535m 0m ☆ 164 setting 9X
352. ☆ 165
339. UC.10 10-stage speed -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0%
Ub.07 Pulse per meter 0.1 to 6553.5 100.0 ☆ 164 setting 10X
353. ☆ 165
UC.11 11-stage speed -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0%
340. setting 11X
Ub.08 Set count value 1 to 65535 1000 ☆ 164
354. ☆ 165
UC.12 12-stage speed -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0%
setting 12X
341.
Specified count
Ub.09 1 to 65535 1000 ☆ 164 355. ☆ 165
value UC.13 13-stage speed -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0%
setting 13X
5-1-14.UC Group - Multi-stage command, simple PLC 356. ☆ 165

UC.14 14-stage speed -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0%
setting 14X
Factory Reference
setting page 357. ☆ 165
UC.15 15-stage speed -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0%
setting 15X
342. 0-stage speed 165
UC.00 -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆ 358. 0: stop after single
setting 0X UC.16 Simple PLC 0 ☆ 166
running mode running
1: hold final value
81 82

Units digit: power- 167 369. 4 stage ☆ 168

down memory UC.27 ac/deceleration time0 to 3 0
selection selection
0: power-down
without memory 370. 5 stage running ☆ 168
359. Simple PLC UC.28 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h)
1: power-down with time T5
UC.17 power-down 00 ☆
memory
memory selection
Tens digit: stop 371. 5 stage ☆ 168
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
memory selection UC.29 ac/deceleration time0 to 3 0
0: stop without selection
memory
1: stop with memory 372. 6 stage running ☆ 168
UC.30 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h)
time T6
360. 0 stage running ☆ 167
UC.18 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h)
time T0 373. 6 stage ☆ 168
UC.31 ac/deceleration time0 to 3 0
361. 0 stage ☆ 167
selection
selection 374. 7 stage running ☆ 168
UC.32 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h)
time T7
UC.20 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h)
time T1 375. 7 stage ☆ 168
363. 1 stage ☆ 167
selection
UC.34 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h)
time T8
UC.22 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h)
time T2 377. 8 stage ☆ 168
365. 2 stage ☆ 167
selection
UC.36 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h)
time T9
UC.24 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h)
time T3 379. 9 stage ☆ 168
367. Simple PLC 3 stage ☆ 167
selection
UC.38 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h)
time T10
368. Simple PLC 4 stage ☆ 167
UC.26 running time 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) 381. ☆ 168
selection UC.39 10 stage 0 to 3 0
ac/deceleration time
83 84

selection potentiometer setting

4: High-speed pulse
382. 11 stage running ☆ 168 setting
UC.40 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h)
time T11 5: PID control setting
6: keyboard set
383. 11 stage ☆ 168 frequency (U0.08)
UC.41 ac/deceleration time0 to 3 0 setting, UP/DN can
selection be modified
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
UC.42 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h)
time T12
5-1-15.Ud Group - Communication parameter
385. 12 stage ☆ 169 Factory Reference
UC.43 ac/deceleration tim 0 to 3 0 No. Code Parameter name Setting range Change
setting page
selection
0: 300BPS
386. 13 stage running ☆ 169 1: 600BPS
UC.44 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) 2: 1200BPS
time T13 394.
3: 2400BPS
Ud.00 Baud rate 5 ☆ 170
387. 13 stage ☆ 169 4: 4800BPS
UC.45 ac/deceleration time0 to 3 0 5: 9600BPS
selection 6: 19200BPS
7: 38400BPS
UC.46 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) 0: no parity (8-N-
time T14 2)
1: even parity (8-
389. 14 stage ☆ 169 395.
E-1)
UC.47 ac/deceleration time0 to 3 0 Ud.01 Data format 0 ☆ 170
2: odd parity (8-
selection O-1)
3: no parity (8-N-
390. 15 stage running ☆ 169 1)
UC.48 0.0s(h) to 6553.5s(h) 0.0s(h)
time T15
396. 1-247, 0 for
Ud.02 This unit address 1 ☆ 170
391. 15 stage ☆ 169 broadcast address
UC.49 ac/deceleration time0 to 3 0 397. Ud.03 Response delay 0ms-20ms 170
selection
2 ☆
398. Communication 0.0 (invalid),
392. Simple PLC run- 0: S (seconds) 0 169
Ud.04 0.1s-60.0s 0.0 ☆ 170
UC.50 ☆ timeout time
time unit 1: H (hours)
Units digit:
0: function code 169 399. MODBUS
393. Multi-stage UC.00 reference Ud.05 Data protocol selection 0: non-standard 30 ☆ 170
UC.51 command 0 1: analog AI1 setting 0 ☆ MODBUS
setting mode 2: analog AI2 setting protocol
3: panel
85 86

1: standard 404. Function code 0: modifiable

MODBUS UP.04 modification 1: not modifiable 0 ☆ 172
protocol properties
Tens digit:
Profibus-DP
5-1-17.E0 Group - Torque control parameters
0: PPO1 format
1: PPO2 format Factory Reference
2: PPO3 format setting page
3: PPO5 format
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
405. 0: speed control
Speed/torque control
400. 0: 0.01A E0.00 0 ★ 172
Ud.06 Communication read 0 ☆ 170 mode selection 1: torque control
current resolution 1: 0.1A
0: keyboard setting
5-1-16.UP Group - Function code management (E0.03)
Factory Reference 1: Analog AI1 setting
No. Code Parameter name Setting range Change 2: Analog AI2 setting
setting page
3: Panel
401. 406. Torque setting source
UP.00 User password 0 to 65535 0 ☆ 171 potentiometer setting
E0.01 selection under 0 ★ 172
4: High-speed pulse
0: no operation torque control mode
setting
1: restore default
5: Communications
parameter values, not reference
including motor 6: MIN (AI1, AI2)
parameters
7: MAX (AI1, AI2)
2: clear history
402. 3: restore default 407. Torque keyboard
Parameter
UP.01 parameter values, 0 ★ 171 E0.03 setting under torque -200.0% to 200.0% 150% ☆ 173
initialization
including motor control mode
parameters
4: backup current user 408.
parameters
E0.04 Torque filter time 0.00s to 10.00s 0 ☆ 173
501: restore from
backup user 409. Torque control 0.00Hz to U0.10
parameters E0.05 forward maximum (maximum 50 ☆ 173
frequency frequency)
Units digit: U group
display selection 410. Torque control 0.00Hz to U0.10
0: not displays E0.06 backward maximum (maximum 50 ☆ 173
403. Function parameter
1: displays frequency frequency)
UP.02 group display 11 ★ 171
Tens digit: E group
selection 411.
display selection Torque control
0: not displays
E0.07 0.00s to 36000s 0.00s ☆ 173
acceleration time
1: displays
412.
Torque control
E0.08 0.00s to 36000s 0.00s ☆ 173
deceleration time
87 88
5-1-18.E5 Group - Control optimization parameters d0 parameters group is used to monitor the inverter running status information,
Factory Reference user can view those information through the panel to facilitate on-site commissioning,
No. Code Parameter name Setting range Change also read parameters group value via communication for host computer monitoring.
setting page
Among them, d0.00 to d0.31 are defined as run and stop monitoring parameters in
413. Upper limiting U7.03 and U7.04
E5.00 frequency for 0.00Hz to 15.00Hz 12 ☆ 173 For the specific parameters function code, name and the smallest unit , see Table 5-
DPWM switching
2.
414. Function code Name Unit
PWM modulation 0: asynchronous
E5.01 0 ☆ 174
manner 1: synchronou d0.00 Set frequency (Hz) 0.01Hz
Actual set frequency
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
0: no compensation
415. Deadband 1: compensation d0.01 Running frequency (Hz) 0.01Hz
E5.02 compensation mode mode 1 1 ☆ 174 Actual output frequency
selection 2: compensation
d0.02 Bus voltage (V) 0.1V
mode 2
Detected value for DC bus voltage
0: Invalid
416.
1 to 10: PWM carrier d0.03 Output voltage (V) 1V
E5.03 Random PWM depth 0 ☆ 174
Actual output voltage
frequency random
depth d0.04 Output current (A) 0.01A
417. Effective value for actual motor current
Fast current limiting 0: disable
E5.04 1 ☆ 174
manner 1: enable d0.05 Output power (kW) 0.1kW
Calculated value for motor output power
418.
Current detection
E5.05 0 to 100 5 ☆ 174 d0.06 Output torque (%) 0.1%
compensation
Motor output torque percentage
419.
Undervoltage point d0.07 DI input status 1
E5.06 60.0% to 140.0% 100.0% ☆ 175
setting DI input status, this value is a hexadecimal digits. The table listed each input
terminal status sequence for each bit:
0: no optimization 0 to 10
Input terminal status
420. Vector optimization 1: optimization mode bits
E5.07 without PG mode 1 1 ☆ 175 0 Invalid
selection 2: optimization mode 1 Valid
2 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
421. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Deadband time 9
E5.08 100% to 200% 150% ☆ 175
adjustment
DI1
422.
Overvoltage point Reserv ed DI2
E5.09 200.0V to 2500.0V 810 ☆ 175
setting Reserv ed DI3
DI4
DI8
DI7 DI5
5-2.Function parameter description
DI6
5-2-1.Basic monitoring parameters: d0.00-d0.61
89 90
d0.08 DO output status 1 PG feedback speed, to an accuracy of 0.1hz

DO output status, this value is a hexadecimal digits. The table listed each output d0.20 Remaining run time 0.1Min
terminal status sequence for each bit:
Remaining run time display, it is for timing run control
0 to 10 bits Output terminal status
0 Invalid d0.24 Linear speed 1m/Min
Linear speed calculated from angular speed and diameter is used for controlling
1 Valid constant tension and constant linear speed.
4 3 2 1 0
2 2 2 2 2 d0.25 Current power-on time 1Min
4 3 2 1 0
Total time of current inverter power-on
SPB
SPB d0.26 Current run time 0.1Min
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
继电
Relay 器1
1 Total time of current inverter run
扩展DO High-speed pulse input
Undefined d0.27 1Hz
SPA
SPA
pulse frequency
High-speed pulse input frequency display, unit: 1hz
Relay
继电器2 2
d0.28 Communication set value 0.01%
d0.09 AI1 voltage (V) 0.01V Frequency, torque or other command values set by communication port
AI1 input voltage value d0.29 Encoder feedback speed 0.01Hz
d0.10 AI2 voltage (V) 0.01V PG feedback speed, to an accuracy of 0.1hz
Master frequency setting
AI2 input voltage value d0.30 0.01Hz
display
Panel potentiometer Frequency set by U0.03 master frequency setting source
d0.11 0.01V
voltage (V)
Auxiliary frequency
Panel potentiometer input voltage value d0.31 0.01Hz
setting display
d0.12 Count value 1 Frequency set by U0.04 auxiliary frequency setting source
Actual pulse count value in counting function d0.33 Synchro rotor position 0.0°
d0.13 Length value 1 Current position angle of synchronous motor rotor
Actual length in fixed length function d0.35 Command torque (%) 0.1%
d0.14 Actual speed 1 Display the set target torque under torque control mode
Motor actual running speed display d0.36 Resolver position 1
d0.15 PID setting 1 Rotor position when rotary transformer is used as a speed feedback
Reference value percentage under PID adjustment mode d0.38 ABZ position 0.0
d0.16 PID feedback 1 Displays AB phase pulse count of the current ABZ or UVW encoder
Feedback value percentage under PID adjustment mode d0.58 Z signal counter
d0.17 PLC stage 1 Displays Z phase pulse count of the current ABZ or UVW encoder
Stage display when PID program is running d0.61 Inverter status
High-speed pulse input Displays inverter running status information
d0.18 0.01kHz
pulse frequency (Hz) Data definition format is as follows:
High-speed pulse input frequency display, unit: 0.01Khz Bit0 0: stop; 1: forward; 2: reverse
Feedback Bit1
d0.19 0.1Hz d0.61 Bit2 0: constant; 1: acceleration; 2:
speed(unit:0.1Hz)
91 92
Bit3 deceleration Analog AI2 setting 3

Bit4 0: bus voltage normal; 1: undervoltage
Panel potentiometer setting 4
High-speed pulse setting 5
Multi-speed operation setting 6
5-2-2.Basic function group: U0.00-U0.28
Simple PLC program setting 7
Parameter Factory Change
Code Setting range PID control setting 8
name setting Limit
G type (constant Remote communications setting 9
1
torque load type)
U0.00 Inverter type 1 ● Select inverter master reference frequency input channels. There are 10 master reference
F type
(fans/pumps 2 frequency channels in all:
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
load type) 0: Keyboard set frequency (U0.08, UP/DN can be modified, power-down without
The parameters is only for user to view the factory model and can not be changed. memory)
1: Suitable for constant torque load 2: Suitable for variable torque load (fans, pumps Initial value for the set frequency is U0.08 "preset frequency" value. The set frequency
load) value of the inverter can be changed by using the ▲ key and ▼ key on the keyboard (or
Vector control multi-function input terminals UP, DOWN).
without PG The Inverter powers down and then powers on again, the set frequency value will be
Motor control
U0.01 Vector control 2 2 ★ recovered as U0.08 "digital preset frequency value".
mode with PG 1: Keyboard set frequency (U0.08, UP/DN can be modified, power-down with memory)
V/F control Initial value for the set frequency is U0.08 "preset frequency" value. The set frequency
Keyboard value of the inverter can be changed by using the ▲ key and ▼ key on the keyboard (or
control (LED 0 multi-function input terminals UP, DOWN).
off) The Inverter powers down and then powers on again, the set frequency value is same as
Terminal block the frequency of the last power-down
Command control (LED 1 Please note that U0.23 is for "digital set frequency stop memory selection ”, U0.23 is
U0.02 0 ☆
source selection on) used to select SAVE or CLEAR frequency correction when the inverter stops Besides,
Communications
U0.23 is not related to the power-down memory but shutdown.
command 2
control (LED 2: Analog AI1 setting
flashes) 3: Analog AI2 setting
Select inverter control command input channel. Inverter control commands include: 4: Panel potentiometer setting
start, stop, forward, reverse and jog, etc. Refers to that the frequency is determined by the analog input terminal, PI9000 control
0: keyboard control ("LOCAL / REMOT" lights out); panel provides two analog input terminals (AI1, AI2).
Operate command control by using RUN, STOP/RST Keys on the operation panel. Either 0V to 10V voltage input or 4mA to 20mA current input, it is selected by the
1: terminal block control ("LOCAL / REMOT" lights up); jumper on the control board.
Operate command control by using multi-function input terminals FWD, REV or FJOG. The corresponding relationship between AI1, AI2 input voltage value and the target
2: communication command control("LOCAL / REMOT" flashes) frequency can be set through U4 function code by user.
Gives the run command from the host computer through the means of communication. Panel potentiometer analog input voltage of 0V to 5V.
Select this option, the optional communication card(Modbus card) is required . 5: High-speed pulse setting
Keyboard set frequency (U0.08, Frequency reference is achieved via terminal pulse reference. Pulse reference signal
UP/DN can be modified, power- 0 specifications: voltage range of 9V to 30V, frequency range of 0 kHz to 100kHz. Pulse
Frequency down without memory) reference only can be inputted from the multi-function input terminal DI5. The relationship
U0.03 source master Keyboard set frequency (U0.08, 0 ☆ between DI5 terminal input pulse frequency and its corresponding setting can be set by
setting UP/DN can be modified, power- 1 U4.28 to U4.31, the correspondence is based on a straight line between 2 points, the pulse
down with memory) input corresponds to the set 100.0%, , it refers to the percent of U0.10 relative to maximum
Analog AI1 setting 2 frequency
6: Multi-speed operation setting
93 94
When multi-stage command operation mode is selected, the different input state range for the set 100% can be set by U0.05 and U0.06.
combination of DI terminal correspond to the different set frequency value. PI9000 can set up 3) When the frequency source is set to pulse input reference, it is similar to analog
more than 4 multi-stage command terminals and 16 statuses, and any 16 "multi-stage reference . Tip: Both master and auxiliary setting of frequency source can not be set in the
commands "can be achieved correspondence through UC group function code, the "multi- same channel, ie U0.03 and U0.04 can not be set as the same value, otherwise easily lead to
stage command" refers to the percent of U0.10 relative to maximum frequency. confusion.
Under the mode, DI terminal function in U4 group parameters will be required to set as Reference Relative to maximum frequency 0
the multi-stage command. object selection
7: Simple PLC program setting U0.05 for frequency Relative to master frequency source 0 ☆
source auxiliary 1
Under the mode, the inverter operating frequency source can be switched between 1 to A
setting
16 any frequency commands, the user can set hold time and ac/deceleration time for 1 to
Frequency
16 frequency command , the specific content refers to the related UC group instructions. U0.06 100% ☆
source auxiliary 0% to 150%
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
8: PID control setting setting range
Select process PID control output as the operating frequency. Generally it is used for
When the frequency source is set to "frequency overlay"(i.e. U0.07 is set to 1, 3 or 4),
closed-loop control, such as constant pressure closed-loop control, constant tension closed-
these two parameters are used to determine the range of adjustment of frequency source
loop control and other occasions.
auxiliary setting.
Select PID as the frequency source, you need to set UA group "PID function"
U0.05 is used to determine the object corresponding to frequency source auxiliary
parameters. setting range, either the maximum frequency or the frequency source master setting, if the
9: Remote communications setting frequency source master setting is selected, so the frequency source auxiliary setting range
PI9000 supports Modbus communication. will be subject to the change of the frequency source master setting.
Communication card must be installed when using the function. Frequency source
Keyboard set frequency (U0.08, Units digit 0 ☆
selection
UP/DN can be modified, power- 0 0
down without memory) Frequency source master setting
Keyboard set frequency (U0.08, Arithmetic result of master and 1
UP/DN can be modified, power- 1 auxiliary(arithmetic relationship
down with memory) depends on tens digit)
Analog AI1 setting 2 switch between frequency source 2
Frequency master setting and auxiliary setting
Analog AI2 setting 3 Switch between frequency source 3
U0.04 source auxiliary 0 ★
setting Panel potentiometer setting 4 master setting and arithmetic result of
Frequency master and auxiliary
High-speed pulse setting 5 Switch between frequency source 4
U0.07 source
Multi-speed operation setting 6 superimposed auxiliary setting and arithmetic result
Simple PLC program setting 7 selection of master and auxiliary
Arithmetic
PID control setting 8 relationship of
Remote communications setting 9 Tens digit master and
auxiliary for
The instructions for use refers to U0.03.
frequency source
When the frequency source auxiliary setting is used as overlays reference (select 0
Master+auxiliary
frequency source as master+auxiliary , master to master+auxiliary or auxiliary to
master+auxiliary ), you need to pay attention to: Master-auxiliary 1
1) When the frequency source auxiliary setting is set to digital reference, the preset Max(master, auxiliary) 2
frequency (U0.08) does not work, user can adjust frequency by using ▲, ▼ keys (or multi- 3
Min (master, auxiliary)
function input terminals UP, DOWN) on the keyboard, adjust directly on the basis of master
frequency source. Frequency source reference is achieved by compounding frequency source master
2) When the frequency source auxiliary setting is set to analog input reference (AI1, setting and frequency source auxiliary setting
AI2, panel potentiometer) or pulse input reference, the frequency source auxiliary setting Units digit: frequency source selection:
95 96
0: Frequency source master setting Maximum

Frequency source master setting is used as command frequency U0.10 output 50.00Hz to 320.00Hz 50.00Hz ★
1: Arithmetic result of master and auxiliary is used as command frequency, for the frequency
arithmetic relationship of master and auxiliary, please see the instructions of function code If analog input, pulse input (DI5) or multi-stage command in PI9000 is selected as
"tens digit". frequency source, the respective 100.0% is calibrated relative to the parameter.
2: Switch between frequency source master setting and auxiliary setting, when multi- When PI9000 maximum output frequency reaches up to 3200Hz, in order to take into
function input terminal 18 (frequency switching) is invalid, the frequency source master account the two indexes of frequency command resolution and frequency input range, the
setting is selected as command frequency. when multi-function input terminal 18 (frequency number of decimal places for frequency command can be selected by U0.22 .
switching) is valid, frequency source auxiliary setting is selected as command frequency. When U0.22 selects 1, the frequency resolution is 0.1Hz, at this time U0.10 can be set in
3: Switch between the frequency source master setting and the arithmetic result of the range from 50.0Hz to 3200.0Hz; When U0.22 selects 2, the frequency resolution is
master and auxiliary, when multi-function input terminal 18 (frequency switching) is invalid, 0.01Hz, at this time U0.10 can be set in the range from 50.00Hz to 320.00Hz.
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
the frequency source master setting is selected as command frequency. When multi-function U0.12 setting 0
input terminal 18 (frequency switching) is valid, the arithmetic result of master and auxiliary AI1 1
is selected as command frequency. Upper limit AI2 2
4: Switch between the frequency source auxiliary setting and the arithmetic result of U0.11 frequency 0 ★
master and auxiliary, when multi-function input terminal 18 (frequency switching) is invalid, source Panel potentiometer setting 3
the frequency source auxiliary setting is selected as command frequency. When multi- High-speed pulse setting 4
function input terminal 18 (frequency switching) is valid, the arithmetic result of master and 5
Communications reference
auxiliary is selected as command frequency.
Setting upper limit frequency. The upper limit frequency can be set from either digital
Tens digit: arithmetic relationship of master and auxiliary for frequency source
setting (U0.12) or analog input channels. If the upper limit frequency is set from analog
0: frequency source master setting + frequency source auxiliary setting
input, the set 100% of analog input is relative to U0.12.
The sum of frequency source master setting plus frequency source auxiliary setting is
To avoid the "Runaway", the setting of upper limit frequency is required, when the
used as command frequency Achieve frequency overlay reference function.
inverter reaches up to the set upper limit frequency value, the inverter will remain operation
1: frequency source master setting - frequency source auxiliary setting
at the upper limit frequency, no further increase.
The difference of frequency source master setting minus frequency source auxiliary
U0.12 Upper limit U0.14 (lower limit frequency) to 50.00Hz ☆
setting is used as command frequency
frequency U0.10 (maximum frequency)
2: MAX (master and auxiliary) take the largest absolute value in frequency source
U0.13 Upper limit 0.00Hz to U0.10 (maximum 0.00Hz ☆
master setting and frequency source auxiliary setting as command frequency. frequency offset frequency)
3: MIN (master and auxiliary) take the smallest absolute value in frequency source When the upper limit frequency is set from the analog or the high-speed pulse, U0.13
master setting and frequency source auxiliary setting as command frequency. In addition, will be used as the offset of set value, the overlay of the offset frequency and U0.11 is used as
when the arithmetic result of master and auxiliary is selected as frequency source, you can set the set value of the final upper limit frequency.
offset frequency by U0.21 and overlay offset frequency to the arithmetic result of master and Lower limit 0.00Hz to U0.12 (lower limit
auxiliary, so as to respond flexibly to various needs. U0.14 0.00Hz ☆
U0.08 Keyboard set 0.00Hz to U0.10(maximum 50.00Hz ☆ When the frequency command is lower than the lower limit frequency set by U0.14, the
frequency frequency) inverter can shut down, and then run at the lower limit frequency or the zero speed, the
When "Digital Setting" or "Terminal UP/DOWN " is selected as frequency source, the running mode can be set by U8.14.
parameter value is the initial value of the inverter frequency digital setting. Carrier
Same direction 0 U0.15 0.5kHz to 16.0kHz - ☆
Running Frequency
U0.09 0 ☆
direction Opposite direction 1 This function is mainly used for improving the noise and vibration phenomena that the
By changing the parameters, the motor steering can be achieved without changing the inverter operation may occur If the carrier frequency is higher, there are more ideal current
motor wiring, which acts as the adjustment of any two lines(U, V, W) of the motor to achieve waveform and less motor noise. It is very applicable in the place to be muted. But at this
the conversion of the motor rotation direction. time, the switching loss of main components is large, the whole unit fevers, the efficiency
Tip: after the parameter is initialized, the motor running direction will be restored to its decreases and the output reduces. At the same time, there is a bigger radio interference,
original status. When the system debugging is completed, please use with caution where the another problem is that the capacitive leakage current increases when running at the high
change of motor steering is strictly prohibited carrier frequency, the equipped leakage protective device may cause malfunction or
overcurrent.
97 98
When running at the low carrier frequency, the above-mentioned phenomenon are four groups of ac/deceleration time displayed will change displayed, the ac/deceleration time
opposite. will change accordingly.
There are different responds to carrier frequency for the different motors. The best Frequency
carrier frequency can be obtained based on the actual situation adjustment. However, with the U0.21 source offset 0.00Hz ☆
frequency when 0.00Hz to U0.10 (maximum
increase of motor capacity, the smaller carrier frequency should be selected. This company frequency)
reserves the right to limit the maximum carrier frequency. superimposing
The adjustment of carrier frequency will have impacts on the following performances: The function code is only valid when the arithmetic result of master and auxiliary is
Carrier Frequency Low → high selected as frequency source.
Motor noise Large → small When the arithmetic result of master and auxiliary is selected as frequency source,
Output current U0.21 is used as offset frequency, and it overlays with the arithmetic result of master and
Poor → good auxiliary as the set value of final frequency so that the frequency setting can be more flexible.
waveform
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Motor temperature High → low Frequency 0.1Hz 1
U0.22 command 2 ★
Inverter temperature Low → high 0.01Hz 2
resolution
Leakage current Small → large
This parameter is used to determine the resolution of all related frequency parameters.
External radiation and
Small → large When the frequency resolution is 0.1Hz, PI9000 maximum output frequency can reach
interference
3200Hz, when the frequency resolution is 0.01Hz , PI9000 maximum output frequency is
Note: the larger the carrier frequency, the higher the whole unit temperature
320.00Hz.
Carrier NO 0
frequency Note: when modifying the function parameters, the number of decimal places of all
U0.16 0 ☆ related frequency parameters will change displayed, the frequency value will change
adjustment as YES 1
per temperature accordingly.
The adjustment of carrier frequency refers to that the inverter automatically adjusts the Shutdown W/O memory 0
carrier frequency according to the radiator temperature, so as to reduce the carrier frequency memory
U0.23 selection for 0 ☆
when the radiator temperature rises, and to restore the carrier frequency when the radiator W/ memory 1
digital set
temperature reduces.
frequency
U0.17 Acceleration - ☆
0.01s to 36000s This feature is only frequency source for the digital set.
time 1
Deceleration "W/O memory" refers to that the digital set frequency value will recovered to U0.08
U0.18 0.01s to 36000s - ☆ (preset frequency) value when the inverter stops, and the frequency correction by the ▲/▼
time 1
Acceleration time refers to the required time when the inverter accelerates from zero key on the keyboard or terminals UP, DOWN is cleared.
frequency to U0.25. "W/ memory" refers to that the digital set frequency is reserved when the inverter stops,
Deceleration time refers to the required time when the inverter decelerates from U0.25 and the frequency correction by the ▲/▼ key on the keyboard or terminals UP, DOWN
to zero frequency. remains valid.
PI9000 provides four groups of ac/deceleration time, user can select by using the digital Maximum frequency(U0.10) 0
Ac/deceleration
input terminal DI, as follows: U0.25 time reference Set frequency 1 0 ★
The first group: U0.17, U0.18; frequency 2
100Hz
The second group: U8.03, U8.04;
The third group: U8.05, U8.06; Ac/deceleration time refers to the required time from zero frequency to U0.25 or from
The fourth group: U8.07, U8.08. U0.25 to zero frequency.
When U0.25 selects 1, the ac/deceleration time depends on the set frequency, if the set
1 second 0
Ac/Deceleration frequency change frequently, and the acceleration of the motor is varied, please use with
U0.19 0.1 second 1 1 ★ caution.
time unit
0.01 second 2 Frequency Running frequency 0
To meet the demand of the various on-site, PI9000 provides three kinds of time unit: 1
command UP /
U0.26 DOWN 0 ★
second, 0.1 second and 0.01 second respectively. Set frequency 1
reference when
Note: when modifying the function parameters, the number of decimal places that the running
99 100
This parameter is valid only when the frequency source is the digital set value. 5-2-3.Motor parameters: U1.00-U1.37
when determining the keyboard ▲ ▼ keys or terminal UP/DOWN action, the method Parameter Factory Change
Code Setting range
to correct the set frequency that is, the target frequency decreases or increases on the basis of name setting Limit
the operating frequency or the set frequency. General asynchronous 0
The obvious difference between two settings appears when the inverter is in the process motor
of ac/deceleration, that is, if the inverter operating frequency is not same as the set frequency, U1.00 Motor type Asynchronous inverter 1 0 ★
selection motor
the different choices of the parameters has very different effect.
Permanent magnet 2
Keyboard
synchronous motor
command
Units digit binding 000 ☆ U1.01 Rated power 0.1kW to 1000.0kW - ★
frequency U1.02 Rated voltage 1V to 2000V - ★
source selection
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
0.01A to 655.35A (inverter
Not binded 0 power ≦ 55kW)
U1.03 Rated current - ★
Keyboard set frequency 1 0.1A to 6553.5A (inverter rate>
55kW)
AI1 2
U1.04 Rated 0.01Hz to U0.10 (maximum - ★
AI2 3 frequency frequency)
Panel potentiometer 4 U1.05 Rated speed 1rpm to 36000rpm - ★
High-speed pulse setting 5 Above U1.01 to U1.05 are the motor nameplate parameters, which affects the accuracy
of the measured parameters. Please set up according to the motor nameplate parameters. The
Multi-speed 6
Binding excellent vector control performance needs the accurate motor parameters. The accurate
frequency Simple PLC 7 identification of parameters is derived from the correct setting of rated motor parameters.
U0.27 source for In order to guarantee the control performance, please configure your motor according to
PID 8
command the inverter standards, the motor rated current is limited to between 30% to 100% of the
source Communications reference 9
inverter rated current. The motor rated current can be set, but can not exceed the inverter
Terminal block rated current. This parameter can be used to determine the inverter's overload protection
command
capacity and energy efficiency for the motor.
binding
Tens digit frequency It is used for the prevention of overheating caused by the self-cooled motor at low
source selection speed , or to correct for protecting the motor when the little change of the motor
(0 to 9, same as characteristics may affect the changes of the motor capacity.
units digit) 0.001Ω to 65.535Ω
Communication U1.06 Asynchronous motor (inverter power <= 55kW) - ★
command stator resistance 0.0001Ω to 6.5535Ω
binding (inverter power> 55kW)
Hundreds digit frequency 0.001Ω to 65.535Ω
source selection U1.07 Asynchronous motor (inverter power <= 55kW) - ★
(0 to 9, same as rotor resistance 0.0001Ω to 6.5535Ω
units digit) (inverter power> 55kW)
Define the combination of 3 operation command channels and 9 frequency reference 0.01mH to 655.35mH
channels for easily synchronously switching. U1.08 Asynchronous motor (inverter power <= 55kW) - ★
The principle for above frequency source reference channel is same as frequency source leakage inductance 0.001mH to 65.535mH
master setting selection U0.03, please see the description of U0.03 function code. The (inverter power> 55kW)
different running command channel can be bundled with the same frequency reference 0.01mH to 655.35mH
channel. When command source has the available frequency source for bundling, in the valid U1.09 Asynchronous motor (inverter power <= 55kW) - ★
mutual inductance 0.001mH to 65.535mH
period of command source , the set frequency source by U0.03 to U0.07 is no longer valid.
(inverter power> 55kW)
U1.10 Asynchronous motor no- 0.01A to U1.03 (inverter - ★
101 102
load current power <= 55kW) ABZ incremental encoder Forward 0

0.1A to U1.03 (inverter U1.30 0 ★
AB phase sequence Backward 1
power> 55kW)
U1.06 to U1.10 are the asynchronous motor parameters, and generally these parameters The function code is only valid to ABZ incremental encoder, that is valid only when
will not appear on the motor nameplate and can be obtained by the inverter auto tunning. U1.28 = 0. It is used to set the AB signal phase sequence of ABZ incremental encoder.
Among which, only three parameters of U1.06 to U1.08 can be obtained by Asynchronous The function codes are valid for asynchronous motors and synchronous motors, when
Motor Parameters Still Auto Tunning; however, not only all five parameters but also encoder preforming asynchronous motor parameters comprehensive auto tunning or synchronous
phase sequence and current loop PI parameters can be obtained by Asynchronous Motor motor parameters comprehensive auto tunning, the AB phase sequence of ABZ incremental
Parameters Comprehensive Auto Tunning encoder can be obtained.
When modifying the motor's rated power (U1.01) or rated voltage (U1.02), the inverter U1.31 Encoder installation angle 0.00 to 359.90 0.00 ★
will automatically calculate and modify the parameter values of U1.06 to U1.10 , and restore The parameter is only valid to synchronous motors control, and it is valid to ABZ
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
these 5 parameters to the motor parameters of commonly used standard Y Series. incremental encoder, UVW incremental encoder, rotational transformer, wire-saving UVW
If the asynchronous motor parameters auto tunning can not be achieved on-site, you can encoder, while invalid to sine and cosine encoders.
enter the corresponding above parameters according to the parameters provided by the The parameter can used for obtaining parameters when performing synchronous motor
manufacturer. parameters still auto tunning and synchronous motor parameters comprehensive auto tunning,
0.001Ω to 65.535Ω and it is very important to the operation of asynchronous motors, therefore after the
Synchronous motor stator (inverter power <= 55kW) asynchronous motor is first installed, the motor parameter auto tunning must be performed
U1.16 - ★
resistance 0.0001Ω to 6.5535Ω for functioning correctly.
(inverter power> 55kW) UVW encoder UVW Forward 0
U1.32 0 ★
0.01mH to 655.35mH phase sequence Backward 1
Synchronous D-axis (inverter power <= 55kW) ★ UVW encoder offset
U1.17 - U1.33 0.00 to 359.90 0.00 ★
inductance 0.001mH to 65.535mH angle
(inverter power> 55kW) The two parameters are valid only for synchronous motor with UVW encoder.
0.01mH to 655.35mH The two parameters can used for obtaining parameters when performing synchronous
motor parameters still auto tunning and synchronous motor parameters comprehensive auto
U1.18 Synchronous Q-axis (inverter power <= 55kW) - ★
inductance tunning, and the two parameters are very important to the operation of asynchronous motors,
0.001mH to 65.535mH
therefore after the asynchronous motor is first installed, the motor parameter auto tunning
(inverter power> 55kW) must be performed for functioning correctly.
U1.20 Synchronous motor back- - ★ Pole-pairs of rotary
0.1V to 6553.5V U1.34 1 to 65535 1 ★
EMF transformer
ABZ incremental 0 The rotary transformer has pole-pairs, the correct pole-pairs parameters must be set
encoder
when using the kind of encoder.
UVW incremental 1 peed feedback PG 0.0s: OFF
encoder U1.36 0.0s ★
disconnection detection
U1.28 Encoder type Rotational 2 0 ★ time 0.1s to 10.0s
transformer
It is used to set encoder disconnection fault detection time, when it is set to 0.0s, the
Sine and cosine 3
encoder inverter does not detect the disconnection fault of encoder.
When the inverter detects a disconnection fault, and the fault lasts for more than U1.36
Wire-saving 4
UVW encoder set time, the inverter gives out Alarm Err.20. message.
PI9000 supports multiple encoder types, the different encoders need different PG card, No operation 0
please correctly choose PG card. Synchronous motor can choose any of the 5 kinds of Asynchronous
encoder, asynchronous motors generally only choose ABZ incremental encoder and Motor parameter auto motor parameters 1
U1.37 still auto tunning 0 ★
rotational transformer. tunning
PG card is installed, it is necessary to correctly set U1.28 according to the actual Asynchronous
motor parameters 2
situation, otherwise the inverter may not play correctly.
comprehensive
103 104
auto tunning For synchronous motor parameters comprehensive auto tunning, the inverter can obtain
Synchronous not only U1.16 to U1.20 motor parameters, as well as encoder information U1.30 U1.31
motor parameters 11 U1.32, U1.33, vector control current loop PI parameters U2.13 to U2.16.
still auto tunning
Synchronous
motor parameters 12
comprehensive 5-2-4.Vector control parameters: U2.00-U2.22
auto tunning U2 function code is only valid to vector control, invalid to V/F control
If the motor is able to disengage the load, in order to obtain a better operating
Factory Change
performance, you can choose comprehensive auto tunning; otherwise, you can only select Code Parameter name Setting range
setting Limit
parameters still auto tunning. Firstly set the parameter according to load condition, and then
☆
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
press RUN key, the inverter will perform parameters auto tunning. Parameters auto tunning U2.00 Speed loop low low P 1～100 30
can be performed only under keyboard operation mode, is not suitable for terminal operation Speed loop low integral
mode and communication operation mode. U2.01 0.01s～10.00s 0.50s ☆
time
0: no operation, which prohibits parameters auto tunning. Speed loop low switching
1: asynchronous motor parameters still auto tunning U2.02 0.00～U2.05 5.00Hz ☆
frequency
Motor type and motor nameplate parameters U1.00 to U1.05 must be set correctly U2.03 Speed loop high P 1～100 20 ☆
before performing asynchronous motor parameters still auto tunning. The inverter can obtain
Speed loop high integral
U1.06 to U1.08 three parameters before performing asynchronous motor parameters still auto U2.04 0.01s～10.00s 1.00s ☆
time
tunning.
Speed loop high switching U2.02～U0.10(max
2: asynchronous motor parameters comprehensive auto tunning U2.05 10.00Hz ☆
During asynchronous motor parameters comprehensive auto tunning, the inverter firstly
PIparameter
performs parameters still auto tunning, and then accelerates up to 80% of the rated motor
frequency according to the acceleration time U0.17, after a period of time, and then
decelerates till stop according to the deceleration time U0.18 to end auto tunning.
U2.00
Before preforming asynchronous motor parameters comprehensive auto tunning, not
U2.01
only motor type and motor nameplate parameters U1.00 to U1.05 must be set properly, but
U2.03
also encoder type and encoder pulses U1.27, U1.28. U2.04
For asynchronous motor parameters comprehensive auto tunning, the inverter can obtain
U1.06 to U1.10 five motor parameters, as well as the AB phase sequence U1.30 of encoder,
vector control current loop PI parameters U2.13 to U2.16.
11: synchronous motor parameters still auto tunning U2.02 U2.05 Frequency of instruction
Motor type and motor nameplate parameters U1.00 to U1.05 must be set correctly
PIparameter diagram
before performing synchronous motor parameters still auto tunning For synchronous motor
parameters still auto tunning, the inverter can obtain the initial position angle, and this is the
Converter operating in different frequency, can choose different speed ring PI
necessary condition of normal operation of synchronous motor, therefore synchronous motor
parameters. Operating frequency is less than the speed ring low switching frequency
must perform parameters auto tunning for the first installation and before the initial use.
(U2.02), speed ring PI control parameters for U2.00 and U2.01. Operating frequency is
12: synchronous motor parameters comprehensive auto tunning
greater than the speed loop, high speed switching frequency (U2.05), speed in PI control
During synchronous motor parameters comprehensive auto tunning, the inverter firstly
parameters for U2.03 and U2.04. Speed ring low switching frequency and speed ring
performs parameters still auto tunning, and then accelerates up to U0.08 according to the
high speed switching frequency speed loop between the PI parameters, for the two
acceleration time U0.17, after a period of time, and then decelerates till stop according to the
groups of PI parameter linear switching, as shown in figure:
deceleration time U0.18 to end auto tunning. Please note that U0.08 must be set to a non-zero
Through the set speed regulator proportion coefficient and the integral time, can
value when performing identification operation.
adjust the speed of the vector control dynamic response characteristics.
Before preforming synchronous motor parameters comprehensive auto tunning, not only
Gain take large, quick response, but will produce oscillation; Gain take hours,
motor type and motor nameplate parameters U1.00 to U1.05 must be set properly, but also
response lag.
encoder pulses U1.27, encoder type U1.28, encoder pole-pairs U1.34 and U1.35.
105 106
Integral time is too large, slow response, external interference control variation; In speed control mode, the maximum value of inverter output torque is controlled by the
Integral time hours, reaction speed, small happen oscillation. torque upper limit source.
Set this value to considering the control stability and response speed, if the factory U2.09 is used to select the setting source of torque upper limit, when it is set by analog,
parameters can't meet the requirements in the factory value based on parameter high-speed pulse or communication, the set 100% corresponds to U2.10, the 100% of U2.10
adjustment, first increase proportion gain to ensure that the system is not oscillation; is the inverter's rated torque.
Then reduced integration time, make the system has faster response, small overshoot Excitation regulator
U2.13 0 to 60000 2000 ☆
and. proportional gain
Note: if the PI parameters Settings, may lead to excessive speed overshoot. Even in
U2.14 Excitation regulator integral 0 to 60000 1300 ☆
overshoot back occurs when overvoltage fault.
gain
U2.06 Vector control differential 50% to 200% 100% ☆ Torque regulator
gain U2.15 0 to 60000 2000 ☆
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
proportional gain
For the sensorless vector control, the parameter can be used to adjust the motor speed
and stability: if the speed of motor with load is low, increases the parameter and vice versa U2.16 Torque regulator integral 0 to 60000 1300 ☆
decreases. gain
Speed loop filter time The regulator parameters of vector control current loop PI, the parameter will be
U2.07 0.000s to 0.100s 0.000s ☆ obtained automatically after performing asynchronous motor parameters comprehensive auto
constant
tunning or synchronous motor parameters comprehensive auto tunning and generally do not
Under vector control mode, properly increases the filter time when speed fluctuate
need to modify it.
wildly; but do not excessively increases, or the lag effect will cause shock.
It is reminded that the dimension that this current loop integral gain adopted is not the
U2.08 Vector control 64 ☆ integration time, but the direct set integral gain. Therefore, if the setting of current loop PI
0 to 200
overexcitation gain
gain is too large, which may cause the oscillation of entire control loop, in the event of
In the process of the inverter's deceleration, the over-excitation control can suppress the oscillation, you can manually reduce PI proportional gain and integral gain.
rise of bus voltage to avoid overvoltage fault. The greater overexcitation gain, the stronger
the inhibitory effect.
For the occasions that the inverter's deceleration easily cause over pressure alarm , the
5-2-5.V/F control parameters: U3.00-U3.11
overexcitation gain needs to be improved. But if overexcitation gain is too large, which easily This group of function code is only valid to V/F control, invalid to vector control.
lead to the increase of output current, you need to weigh in practical applications. V/F control is suitable for fans, pumps and other universal loads, or one inverter
For the small inertia occasions that the inverter's deceleration will not cause voltage rise, with multiple motors, or for the applications that inverter power is significantly different
it is recommended to set overexcitation gain as 0; the set value is also suitable for the from the motor power.
occasions with braking resistor. Factory Change
Function code U2.10 Code Parameter name Setting range
0 setting Limit
setting
AI1 1 Linear V/F 0
AI2 2 Multi-point V/F 1

Panel potentiometer 0 ☆ Square V/F 2
Torque limit source under 3
U2.09 setting U3.00 V/F curve setting 1.2th power V/F 3 0 ★
speed control mode High-speed pulse 4 1.4th power V/F 4
setting
Communication 5 6
setting 1.6th power V/F
Min(AI1, AI2) 6 1.8th power V/F 8
Max(AI1, AI2) 7 0: linear V/F
Suitable for ordinary constant torque load.
Upper limit digital setting 1: multi-point V/F
U2.10 for lower torque under 0.0% to 200.0% 150.0% ☆
Suitable for dehydrator, centrifuge and other special loads Any VF relationship curves
speed control mode
107 108
can be obtained by setting parameters U3.03 to U3.08. Multi-point VF U3.05 to rated motor
U3.07 0.00Hz ★
2: square V/F frequency point F3 frequency(U1.04)
Suitable for fans, pumps and centrifugal loads.
Multi-point VF voltage
3 to 8: VF relationship curve between linear VF and square VF. U3.08 0.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ★
point V3
0.0%: automatic torque
U3.03 to U3.08 six parameters are used to define multi-point V/F curve.
U3.01 Torque boost boost 10 ★
The multi-point V/F curve is set according to the load characteristics of motor, please be
0.1% to 30.0% noted that the relationship between three voltage points and three frequency points must be
U3.02 Torque boost cut-off 0.00Hz to U0.10 15.00Hz ★ meet: V1 <V2 <V3, F1 <F2 <F3. The setting of multi-point VF curve is as shown in below
frequency (maximum frequency) figure.
Torque boost is mainly used to improve the characteristics of the torque low-frequency In the sate of low frequency, if the voltage is set to a higher value, which may cause
motor overheating even burned, the inverter may appear overcurrent stall or overcurrent
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
under V/F control mode. If the torque boost is too low, the motor will work at the lower
speed and power. If the torque boost is too high, the motor will run with overexcitation, the protection.
inverter's output current increases and the efficiency is reduced. Voltage %
电压%
It is recommended to increase this parameter when the motor works with heavy load but
Vb
without enough torque. The torque boost can be reduced when the load is lighter. When the
torque boost is set to 0.0, the inverter will automatically perform torque boost, the inverter
can automatically calculates the required torque boost value according to the motor stator V3
V2
resistance parameters.
Torque boost cutoff frequency: torque boost is valid below this frequency, invalid above
the set frequency. V1
Frequency
Output %
频率%
输出电压 F1 F2 F3 Fb
voltage
V1-V3：多段速V/F第1-3段电压百分比
V1-V3: Volt ag e percent age o f st ag e 1-3 to multi-sp eed V/F F1-F3：多段速V/F第1-3段频率百分比
F1-F3: Frequen cy percent ag e o f stag e 1-3 to multi-sp eed V/F
Vb Vb: Rated motor voltage Fb: Rated motor op erating freq uency
Vb：电机额定电压 Fb：电机额定运行频率
多点V/F曲线设定示意图
Schematic diagram of multi-point V/F curve setting
V1 VF slip compensation
U3.09 0% to 200.0% 0.0% ☆
gain
f1 fb
输出频率
Output frequency This parameter is valid only for asynchronous motors.
V1：手动转矩提升电压 VF slip compensation can compensate for the speed deviation of asynchronous motor
V1: Manual torque boost voltage Vb：最大输出电压
Vb: Maximum output voltage
f1: Manual torque boost cut-off frequency
f1：手动转矩提升截止频率 fb: Rated operating frequency
fb：额定运行频率 when the load increases, so as to keep stable speed when the load changes.
Schematic diagram of manual torque boost voltage If VF slip compensation gain is set to 100.0%, it means that the compensated deviation
手动转矩提升示意图
is equal to the rated motor slip under the rated motor load mode, while the rated motor slip
can be calculated through U1 group of motor rated frequency and rated speed.
Multi-point VF When adjusting VF slip compensation gain, generally it is based on the principle that the
U3.03 0.00Hz to U3.05 0.00Hz ★
frequency point F1 motor speed is same as the target speed. When the motor speed is different from target value,
Multi-point VF voltage it is necessary to appropriately fine-tune the gain.
U3.04 0.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ★
point V1 U3.10 VF overexcitation gain 0 to 200 64 ☆
Multi-point VF In the process of the inverter's deceleration, the over-excitation control can suppress the
U3.05 U3.03 to U3.07 0.00Hz ★
frequency point F2 rise of bus voltage to avoid overvoltage fault. The greater overexcitation gain, the stronger
the inhibitory effect.
Multi-point VF voltage
U3.06 0.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ★ For the occasions that the inverter's deceleration easily cause over pressure alarm , the
point V2
overexcitation gain needs to be improved. But if overexcitation gain is too large, which easily
109 110
lead to the increase of output current, you need to weigh in practical applications. These parameters are used to set the digital multi-function input terminal, the optional
For the small inertia occasions that the inverter's deceleration will not cause voltage rise, functions are shown in the following table:
it is recommended to set overexcitation gain as 0; the set value is also suitable for the Set
occasions with braking resistor. Function Description
value
VF oscillation
U3.11 0 to 100 - ☆ The terminal for not use can be set to "no
suppression gain 0 No function
function" to prevent accidental operation.
The method of selecting gain is take the value as smaller as possible with the premise
that effectively suppressing oscillation, in order to avoid the adverse affect caused by VF 1 Forward run (FWD) External terminals are used to control the
running. Please select 0 as the gain when the motor has not oscillation phenomenon. Only 2 Reverse run (REV) FWD/REV run mode of inverter.
increase gain value when the motor has obvious oscillation, the greater gain, the more
obvious the suppression of oscillation. This terminal is used to determine the inverter's
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
When using the function of oscillation suppression, which requires that the motor's rated Three-wire operation three-wire control mode. For details, please refer to
3
current and no-load current parameters must be accurate, otherwise VF oscillation control the instructions of function code U4.11 ("terminal
suppression is ineffective. command mode).
4 Forward JOG(FJOG) FJOG means Forward JOG running, RJOG means
5-2-6.Input terminals: U4.00-U4.39 Reverse JOG running. For Jog running frequency
PI9000 series inverter of below 11KW is equipped with 6 multi-function digital and Jog Ac/deceleration time, please refer to the
5 Reverse JOG(RJOG) description of the function code U8.00, U8.01,
input terminals, the inverter of above 11KW is equipped with 8 multi-function digital
U8.02.
input terminal (of which DI5 can be used as a high-speed pulse input terminal ), and 2
analog input terminals. 6 Terminal UP Modify frequency increment/decrement command
when the frequency is referenced by external
Factory Change
Code Parameter name Setting range terminal. Adjust up/down the set frequency when
setting Limit 7 Terminal DOWN the digital setting is selected as the frequency
DI1 terminal function source.
U4.00 0 to 59 1
selection
The inverter output is blocked, at the time, the
DI2 terminal function parking process of motor is not controlled by the
U4.01 0 to 59 2 8 Free stop
selection inverter. This way is same as the principle of free
DI3 terminal function stop described in U6.10.
U4.02 0 to 59 8
selection
The function make use of terminal for fault reset.
DI4 terminal function It has same function with RESET key on the
U4.03 0 to 59 9 9 Fault reset (RESET)
selection keyboard. This function can be used to realize
DI5 terminal function remote fault reset.
U4.04 0 to 59 12 ★
selection The inverter slows down and stops, but all
DI6 terminal function operating parameters are memorized. Such as
U4.05 0 to 59 13 PLC parameters, wobbulate frequency
selection
10 Run pausing
parameters, and PID parameters. This terminal
DI7 terminal function
U4.06 0 to 59 signal disappears, the inverter reverts to the
selection
previous state of running before parking.
DI8 terminal function
U4.07 0 to 59 When the signal is sent to the inverter, the inverter
selection
External fault normally reports fault Err.15, and performs troubleshooting
U4.08 Undefined 11
open input according to fault protection action (for details,
U4.09 Undefined please refer to the function code U9.47).
111 112
12 Multi-speed terminal 1 27 Length count input Input terminal of the length count.
13 Multi-speed terminal 2 The setting of 16 stage speed or 16 kinds of other 28 Length reset Clear length
command can be achieved through the 16 states of
14 Multi-speed terminal 3 the four terminals. For details, see Table 1 When the inverter torque control is prohibited, the
29 Torque control prohibited
inverter will enter speed control mode.
15 Multi-speed terminal 4
High-speed pulse input
Ac/deceleration time 30 DI5 is used as pulse input terminal.
16 The selection of 4 ac/deceleration times can be (only valid for DI5 )
selection terminal 1
achieved through the 4 states of the two terminals. 31 Reserve Reserve
Ac/deceleration time
17 For details, see Table 2
selection terminal 2 Immediately DC braking If the terminal is active, the inverter switches
Used to switch between different frequency 32
directly to DC braking status
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
sources.
Frequency source When the signal of external fault normally closed
18 According to frequency source selection function External fault normally
switching 33 input is inputted into the inverter, the inverter will
code (U0.07) settings, the terminal is used to closed input
report fault Err.15 and shutdown.
switch between two frequency sources.
If the function is set to be valid, when the
When the frequency reference is the digital
frequency changes, the inverter does not respond
frequency, this terminal is used to clear the 34 Frequency change enable
UP/DN setting (terminal, to frequency changes until the terminal state is
19 changed frequency value by terminal UP/DOWN
keyboard) invalid.
or keyboard UP/DOWN, so that the reference
frequency can recover to the set value of U0.08. PID action direction as If the terminal is valid, PID action direction
35
reverse opposites to the direction set by UA.03
When the command source is set to the terminal
control (U0.02 = 1), the terminal can be used to Under keyboard control mode, the terminal can be
External parking terminal
switch between terminal control and keyboard 36 used to stop the inverter, same as STOP key on the
1
Run command switch control. keyboard.
20
terminal When the command source is set to the Used to switch between terminal control and
communication control (U0.02 = 2), the terminal communication control. If the command source is
can be used to switch between communication Control command switch
37 selected as terminal control, the system will be
control and keyboard control. terminal 2
switched to the communication control mode
Ensure the inverter is free from external signals when the terminal is active; vice versa.
Ac/deceleration
21 affect (except for shutdown command), maintain When the terminal is active, the PID integral
prohibited
current output frequency. 38 PID integral pause adjustment function is paused, but the proportion
PID is temporarily disabled, the inverter maintains and differential adjustments of PID are still valid.
22 PID pause current output frequency, no longer performs PID Switch between When the terminal is active, the frequency source
adjustment of frequency source. frequency source master A is replaced with the preset frequency (U0.08)
39
setting and preset
When PLC pauses and runs again, this terminal is
frequency
23 PLC status reset used to reset the inverter to the initial state of
Switch between When the terminal is active, the frequency source
simple PLC.
frequency source B is replaced with the preset frequency (U0.08)
40
When the inverter outputs at center frequency. auxiliary setting and
24 Wobbulate pause
Wobbulate will pause preset frequency
25 Counter input Input terminal of the count pulse 41 Reserve
26 Counter reset Clear counter status 42 Reserve
113 114
When DI terminal (UA.18 = 1) is used to switch 1-stage speed

OFF OFF OFF ON UC.01
PID parameters, if the terminal is invalid, PID setting 1X
43 PID parameter switching
parameters use UA.05 to UA.07; if the terminal is
2-stage speed
valid, PID parameters use UA.15 to UA.17 OFF OFF ON OFF UC.02
setting 2X
44 Custom fault 1 When custom fault 1 and custom fault 2 are active,
3-stage speed
the inverter respectively alarm fault Err.27 and OFF OFF ON ON UC.03
setting 3X
fault Err.28, and deals with them according to the
45 Custom fault 2 mode selected by the fault protection action 4-stage speed
OFF ON OFF OFF UC.04
U9.49. setting 4X
Switch between speed control mode and torque 5-stage speed
OFF ON OFF ON UC.05
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
control mode under vector control mode. If the setting 5X
Speed control / torque terminal is invalid, the inverter will run at the
46 6-stage speed
control switching mode defined by E0.00 (speed/torque control OFF ON ON OFF UC.06
setting 6X
mode); if the terminal is valid, the inverter will be
switched to another mode. 7-stage speed
OFF ON ON ON UC.07
setting 7X
If the terminal is valid, the inverter will park at the
fastest speed, and the current maintains at the set 8-stage speed
ON OFF OFF OFF UC.08
upper limit during the parking process. This setting 8X
47 Emergency parking
function is used to meet the requirements that the 9-stage speed
inverter needs to stop as soon as possible when the ON OFF OFF ON UC.09
setting 9X
system is in a emergency state.
10-stage speed
In any control mode (keyboard control, terminal ON OFF ON OFF UC.10
setting 10X
control, communication control), the terminal can
External parking terminal 11-stage speed
48 be used to decelerate the inverter until stop, at the ON OFF ON ON UC.11
2 setting 11X
time the deceleration time is fixed for deceleration
time 4. 12-stage speed
ON ON OFF OFF UC.12
If the terminal is valid, firstly the inverter setting 12X
decelerates to the initial frequency of stop DC 13-stage speed
49 Deceleration DC braking ON ON OFF ON UC.13
braking, and then switches directly to DC braking setting 13X
status.
14-stage speed
If the terminal is valid, the inverter's current ON ON ON OFF UC.14
setting 14X
Clear current running running time is cleared, the function needs to work
50 15-stage speed
time with Timing run (U8.42) and Current running time ON ON ON ON UC.15
arrival(U8.53). setting 15X
51-59 Reserve When multi-speed is selected as frequency source, the 100.0% of function code UC.00
to UC.15 corresponds to maximum frequency U0.10. Multi-stage command is used for the
Table 1 Function description of multi-stage command function of multi-speed, also for PID reference source to meet the need to switch between
The 4 multi-stage command terminals can be combined as 16 status, these 16 status different reference values.
have 16 command set values. As shown in Table 1: Table 2 - function description of ac/deceleration time selection terminal
K4 K3 K2 K1 Command setting Parameters Termi Termin Ac/deceleration time
Parameters
0-stage speed nal 2 al 1 selection
OFF OFF OFF OFF UC.00
setting 0X
115 116
Acceleration time
OFF OFF U0.17, U0.18 This parameter defines four different modes to control inverter operation through
1
external terminals.
Acceleration time 0: Two-wire type 1
OFF ON U8.03, U8.04 This mode is the most commonly used two-wire mode. The forward/reverse operation of
2
motor is determined by terminal DIx, DIy.
Acceleration time The terminal function is set as follows:
ON OFF U8.05, U8.06
3
Terminals Set value Description
Acceleration time DIx 1 Forward run (FWD)
ON ON U8.07, U8.08
4
DIy 2 Reverse run (REV)
U4.10 DI filter time 0.000s to 1.000s 0.010s ☆ Of which, DIx and DIy are the multi-function input terminals of DI1 to DI10, the level
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Set software filter time for DI terminals status. For the application that input terminals is active.
are vulnerable to interference and cause the accidental operation, you can increase this
K1 K2 Command
parameter so as to enhance the anti-interference ability. However, the increase of filter time
will cause DI terminal slow response. K1
0 0 Stop
Two-wire 0 DIx Forward (FWD)
type 1 K2
0 1 REV
Two-wire 1 DIy Reverse (REV)
U4.11 Terminal command type 2 0 ★ 1 0 FWD COM Digital common terminals

mode Three-wire 2
type 1
1 1 Stop
Three-wire 3
type 2
Two-wire mod e 1
1: Two-wire type 2
In the mode, DIx terminal is used as running enabled, while DIy terminal is used to
determine running direction.
The terminal function is set as follows:
DIx 1 Forward run (FWD)
DIy 2 Reverse run (REV)
Of which, DIx and DIy are the multi-function input terminals of DI1 to DI10, the level
is active.
K1 K2 Command
K1
0 1 Stop
DIx Forward (FWD)
K2
0 1 Stop DIy Reverse (REV)
1 0 FWD COM Digital common terminals
1 1 REV
Two-wire mod e 1
117 118
2: Three-wire control mode 1 active level.

In the mode, DIn is used as enabled terminal, while DIx, DIy terminal are used to
control direction. The terminal function is set as follows:
SB2
DIx 1 Forward run (FWD) SB3 Command DIx Forward run
DIy 2 Reverse run (REV) SB1

FWD
DIn Three-wire operation control
Three-wire operation
DIn 3 SB3
control REW
DIy Reverse run
To run, firstly close DIn terminal, the forward or reverse of motor is controlled by the
ascendant edge of DIx or DIy pulse COM Digital common terminals
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
To stop, you must disconnect DIn terminal signals Of which, DIx, DIy and DIn are the
multi-function input terminals of DI1 to DI10, DIx and DIy are for active pulse, DIn is for
active level. Three-wire control mode 1
Of which:
SB1: Stop button SB2: Run button
Terminal UP / DOWN
U4.12 0.01Hz/s to 65.535Hz/s 1.00Hz/s ☆
SB2 change rate
DIx 正转运行FWD
Forward run Used to set terminal UP/DOWN adjustment frequency, the rate of frequency change, i.e.
frequency change amount per second.
SB1
DIn 三线式运行控制
Three-wire When U0.22 (frequency decimal point) is 2, the value range is 0.001Hz/s to 65.535Hz/s.
operation
control When U0.22 (frequency decimal point) is 1, the value range is 0.01Hz/s to 655.35Hz/s.
SB3 Minimum input value
DIy 反转运行REV
Reverse run U4.13 0.00V to U4.15 0.00V ☆
for AI curve 1
Digital
COM 数字量公共端
common
U4.14
Minimum input setting
-100.00% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
terminals
for AI curve 1
U4.15 Maximum input for AI 10.00V ☆

三线式控制模式1 U4.13 to 10.00V
Three-wire control mode 1 curve 1
Of which: U4.16 Maximum input 100.0% ☆

-100.00% to 100.0%
setting for AI curve 1
SB1: Stop button SB2: Forward button SB3: Reverse button
U4.17 AI1 filter time 0.00s to 10.00s 0.10s ☆
3: Three-wire control mode 2 The above function codes are used to set the relationship between analog input voltage
In the mode, DIn is the enabled terminal, the running commands are given by DIx, the and its representatives set value.
direction is determined by the state of DIy. When the analog input voltage is more than the set Maximum Input (U4.15), the analog
The terminal function is set as follows: voltage takes the Maximum Input as the calculated value, Similarly, when the analog input
Terminals Set value Description voltage is less than the set Minimum Input (U4.13), according to the Setting Selection For AI
Less Than Minimum Input (U4.34), the analog voltage takes Minimal Input or 0.0% as the
DIx 1 Forward run (FWD)
calculated value.
DIy 2 Reverse run (REV) When the analog input is the current input, 1mA current is equivalent to 0.5V voltage.
AI1 input filter time is used to set AI1 software filter time, When the on-site analog
Three-wire operation
DIn 3 quantity is easily interfered, please increase the filter time to stabilize the detected analog
control quantity, but the greater filter time, the slower analog detection response, the proper setting
To run, firstly close DIn terminal, the motor run signal is generated by the ascendant method depends on the actual application.
edge of DIx, the motor direction signal is generated by DIy status In the different applications, the 100.0% of analog setting vary from the meaning of its
To stop, you must disconnect DIn terminal signals Of which, DIx, DIy and DIn are the corresponding nominal value, please refer to the description of each application for details.
multi-function input terminals of DI1 to DI10, DIx is for active pulse, DIy and DIn are for The two legends are for two typical settings.
119 120
U4.22 AI2 filter time 0.00s to 10.00s 0.10s ☆

Corresponding setup
对应设定 For the function and use of curve 2, please refer to the description of curve 1.
(Frequency, torque)
（频率，转矩）
100% U4.23 Minimum input value 0.00V ☆

0.00s to U4.25
for AI curve 3
U4.24 Minimum input setting 0.0% ☆

-100.00% to 100.0%
for AI curve 3
Maximum input for AI
U4.25 U4.23 to 10.00V 10.00V ☆
A1 curve 3
0V(0mA) 10V(20mA) Maximum input
U4.26 -100.00% to 100.0% 100.0% ☆
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
U4.27 Filtering time of panel 0.10s ☆
0.00s to 10.00s
potentiometer
For the function and use of curve 3, please refer to the description of curve 1.
Minimum pulse input
Corresponding setup U4.28 0.00kHz to U4.30 0.00kHz ☆
对应设定 frequency
(Frequency, torque)
（频率，转矩）
U4.29 Minimum pulse input 0.0% ☆
100% -100.00% to 100.0%
frequency setting
U4.30 Maximum pulse input 50.00kHz ☆

U4.28 to 100.00kHz
frequency
Maximum pulse input
U4.31 -100.00% to 100.0% 100.0% ☆
frequency setting
A1
0V(0mA)
U4.32 Filter time of pulse 0.10s ☆
10V(20mA) 0.00s to 10.00s
input
This group function code is used to set the relationship between DI5 pulse frequency
and its corresponding setting.
Pulse frequency can be inputted into the inverter only through DI5 channel. The
application on this group of functions is similar to curve 1, please refer to the description of
-100% curve 1.
Units digit AI1 curve
模拟给定与设定量的对应关系
Relationship between analog reference and set amount selection
Curve 1 (2
points, see 1
U4.13 to
Minimum input value
U4.18 0.00V to U4.20 0.00V ☆ U4.16)
for AI curve 2
U4.33 AI curve selection Curve 2 (2 321 ☆
U4.19 Minimum input setting 0.0% ☆ points, see
-100.00% to 100.0% 2
for AI curve 2 U4.18 to
Maximum input for AI U4.21)
U4.20 U4.18 to 10.00V 10.00V ☆ Curve 3 (2
curve 2
points, see 3
Maximum input
U4.21 -100.00% to 100.0% 100.0% ☆ U4.23 to
U4.26)
121 122
Tens digit AI2 curve U4.36 DI2 delay time 0.0s to 3600.0s 0.0s ★
selection (1
U4.37 DI3 delay time 0.0s to 3600.0s 0.0s ★
to 3, as
above) Used to set the inverter's delay time for the change of DI terminal status
Hundreds Panel Currently only DI1, DI2, DI3 terminals can set the delay time function.
digit potentiometer Units digit DI1 terminal
curve active status
selection (1 setting
to 3, as High level 0
above) active
Units digit, tens digit and hundreds digit the function code are used to respectively select Low level 1
the corresponding set curves of analog input AI1, AI2, AI3. active
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
3 analog input can respectively select any one of 3 curves. DI2 terminal
Curve 1, curve 2 and curve 3 are 2-point curve, they are set in U4 function code. active status
Tens digit setting (0 to 1,
Setting
selection for as above)
Units digit AI1 less than DI terminal valid
U4.38 DI3 terminal 0 ★
minimum mode selection 1 Hundreds active status
input setting (0 to 1,
digit
The as above)
corresponding 0
minimum DI4 terminal
input setting Thousands active status
digit setting (0 to 1,
0.0% 1
as above)
Setting selection for Setting DI5 terminal
U4.34 AI less than minimum selection for 000 ☆ active status
AI2 less than Ten thousands
input Tens digit digit setting (0 to 1,
minimum as above)
input(0 to 1,
ditto) DI6 terminal
Units digit active status
Setting
setting
selection for
panel High level 0
Hundreds potentiometer active
digit less than Low level 1
minimum active
input(0 to 1, DI7 terminal
ditto) DI terminal valid active status
U4.39 Tens digit setting (0 to 1, 0 ★
The function code is used to set analog quantity and its corresponding setting when the mode selection 2
analog input voltage is less than the set Minimum Input. as above)
Units digit, tens digit and hundreds digit the function code respectively correspond to DI8 terminal
the analog input AI1, AI2, panel potentiometer. If 0 is selected, when the analog input is less active status
Hundreds
than the Minimum Input, the setting corresponding to the analog amount is the setting of setting (0 to 1,
minimum input of the function code curve (U4.14, U4.19, U4.24).
digit
as above)
If 1 is selected, when the analog input is less than the minimum input, the setting
corresponding to the analog amount is 0.0%. DI9 terminal
Thousands
U4.35 DI1 delay time 0.0s to 3600.0s 0.0s ★ active status
123 124
as above) The above five function codes are used to select five digital output functions.
Multifunction output terminal function is described as follows:
DI10 terminal Set
Ten thousands active status Function Description
value
as above) 0 No output No output action
Used to set the digital input terminal active status mode. If high level is selected as The inverter is in operation with output
1 Inverter in service
active, it is active when the corresponding DI terminal and COM are connected, disconnected frequency (zero), and outputs ON signal.
for inactive. If low level is selected as active, it is inactive when the corresponding DI Fault output (fault When the inverter occurs failure and
2
terminal and COM are connected, disconnected for active. shutdown) stops, and outputs ON signal.
Frequency level Please refer to the instructions of function
3
detection FDT1 output code U8.19, U8.20
5-2-7.Output terminals: U5.00-U5.22 Please refer to the instructions of function
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
4 Frequency arrival
PI9000 series inverter is equipped with 2 multi-function digital output terminals code U8.21
Outputs ON signal when the inverter is in
and 2 analog output terminals ( one of them can be selected as a high-speed pulse output
Zero speed running operation with output frequency (zero) Outputs
terminal , the inverter of below 11KW is equipped with one multi-function relay output 5
(shutdown without output) OFF signal when the inverter is in the sate of
terminal, and the inverter of above 11KW is equipped with two multi-function relay stop
output terminals. Before motor overload protection action,
Factory Change it will output ON signal if it exceeds the pre-
Motor overload pre-
Code Parameter name Setting range 6 alarm threshold. Please refer to function code
setting Limit alarm
U9.00 to U9.02. for motor overload parameter
High-speed 0 setting.
pulse output Inverter overload pre- Outputs ON signal within 10s before
SPB terminal output mode 7
U5.00 Switching 0 ☆ alarm inverter overload protection action
selection
quantity 1 Outputs ON signal when the count value
8 Set count value arrival
output reaches the value set by Ub.08.
SPB terminal is a programmable complex terminals, it can be used as an output terminal Outputs ON signal when the count value
of high-speed pulse, also an switching output terminal of collector open circuit. Specified count value reaches the value set by Ub.09. Please refer to
9
As a high-speed pulse output, the highest frequency of output pulse is 100kHz, please arrival the instructions of Ub group for counting
see the instructions of U5.06 for high-speed pulse output function. function.
Switching quantity Outputs ON signal when the detected
10 Length arrival
output function selection actual length exceeds the set length by Ub.05.
U5.01 0-40 0 ☆ Outputs a width of 250ms pulse signal
(collector Open circuit 11 PLC cycle completed
output terminals) when simple PLC completes a cycle
Outputs ON signal when the inverter's
Relay 1 output function Cumulative running
12 cumulative running time exceeds the set time
U5.02 selection 0-40 2 ☆ time arrival
by U8.17.
(TA1.TB1.TC1) Outputs ON signal when the rated
U5.03 Undefined 0-40 0 ☆ Frequency being
frequency exceeds the upper limit frequency or
13 the lower limit frequency, and the output
SPA output function limited
frequency of inverter also reaches the upper
U5.04 selection (collector Open 0-40 1 ☆ limit frequency or the lower limit frequency.
circuit output terminals) Outputs ON signal when the output torque
Relay 2 output function reaches the torque limit value and the inverter
14 Torque being limited
U5.05 selection 0-40 4 ☆ is in the stall protection status under inverter
(TA2.TB2.TC2) speed control mode
Outputs ON signal when the power supply
15 Ready for operation of the inverter main circuit and control circuit
has stabilized, and the inverter has not any fault
125 126
information and is in the runnable status. Software current Please refer to the instructions of function
36
Outputs ON signal when the value of overrun code U8.36, U8.37
16 AI1> AI2 analog input AI1 is greater than the AI2 input Outputs ON signal when the operating
value, Lower limit frequency frequency reaches the lower limit frequency
37
Upper limit frequency arrival(stop with output) Outputs ON signal too when the inverter is in
Outputs ON signal when the operating
17 the sate of stop
arrival frequency reaches the upper limit frequency,
Lower limit frequency Outputs ON signal when the operating When the inverter occurs failure and
38 Alarm output
arrival frequency reaches the lower limit frequency continues to run, the inverter alarms output.
18 Outputs ON signal when the motor
(shutdown without Outputs OFF signal when the inverter is in the
output) state of stop temperature reaches U9.58 (motor overheat
39 Motor overheat alarm
pre-alarm threshold), (The motor's temperature
Undervoltage status Outputs ON signal when the inverter is in
19 can be viewed through d0.34)
output the undervoltage condition
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Communication Please refer to communication protocol. Outputs ON signal when the inverter's
20 Current running time
setting 40 current running time exceeds the set time by
arrival
U8.53.
21 Reserve Reserve
22 Reserve Reserve High-speed pulse output
U5.06 0-16 0 ☆
Outputs ON signal when the inverter function selection
Zero speed running 2
23 output frequency is 0. Outputs ON signal too DA1 output function 0-16
(shutdown with output)
when the inverter is in the state of stop U5.07 0 ☆
selection
Outputs ON signal when the inverter's DA2 output function
Accumulated power- U5.08 0-16 1 ☆
24 accumulated power-on time(U7.11) exceeds selection
on time arrival
the set time by U8.16. High-speed pulse output frequency range is 0.01kHz to U5.09 (maximum frequency of
Frequency level Please refer to the instructions of function high-speed pulse output), U5.09 can be set between 0.01kHz to 100.00kHz.
25
detection FDT2 output code U8.28, U8.29 Analog output DA1 and DA2 output range is 0V to 10V, or 0mA to 20mA. The range of
Frequency 1 reaches Please refer to the instructions of function pulse output or analog output and the corresponding calibration relation are shown in the
26
output value code U8.30, U8.31 following table:
Frequency 2 reaches Please refer to the instructions of function Set
27 Function Description
output value code U8.32, U8.33 value
Current 1 reaches Please refer to the instructions of function
28 0 Running frequency 0 to maximum output frequency
output value code U8.38, U8.39
Current 2 reaches Please refer to the instructions of function 1 Set frequency 0 to maximum output frequency
29
output value code U8.40, U8.41 2 Output current 0 to 2 times rated motor current
Outputs ON signal when timer(U8.42)is
Timer reaches output 3 Output torque 0 to 2 times rated motor torque
30 active and after the inverter's current running
value
time reaches the set time. 4 Output power 0 to 2 times rated power
Outputs ON signal when the analog input
5 Output voltage 0 to 1.2 times rated inverter voltage
AI1 value is greater than U8.46 (AI1 input
31 AI1 input exceed limit High-speed pulse
protection upper limit) or less than U8.45 (AI1 6 0.01kHz to 100.00kHz
input protection limit) input
Outputs ON signal when the inverter is in 7 AI1 0V to 10V
32 Load droping
the load drop status. 8 AI2 0V to 10V (or 0 to 20mA)
Outputs ON signal when the inverter is in
33 Reverse running 9 Reserve
the reverse running status.
Please refer to the instructions of function 10 Length 0 to maximum set length
34 Zero current status
code U8.34, U8.35
11 Count value 0 to maximum count value
Outputs ON signal when the inverter
Module temperature Communication
35 module radiator temperature(U7.05)reaches the 12 0.0% to 100.0%
arrival setting
set temperature(U8.47).
127 128
0 to speed with maximum output Relay 1

13 Motor speed
frequency terminal
0.0A to 100.0A (inverter power ≦ Tens digit active status
14 Output current 55kW); 0.0A to 1000.0A (inverter power> setting (0 to 1,
55kW) as above)
15 DC bus voltage 0.0V to 1000.0V Expansion D0
terminal
Hundreds
active status
Maximum output 0.01kHz to 100.00kHz digit
U5.09 ☆ setting (0 to 1,
frequency of high-speed 50.00kHz
as above)
pulse
SPA terminal
SPB terminal is selected as pulse output, the function code is used to select the Thousands active status
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
maximum value of output pulse. digit setting (0 to 1,
U5.10 DA1 zero bias coefficient -100.0% to +100.0% 0.0% ☆ as above)
U5.11 DA1 gain -10.00 to +10.00 1.00 ☆ Relay 2
Ten terminal
U5.12 DA2 zero bias coefficient -100.0% to +100.0% 0.00% ☆ thousands active status
U5.13 ☆ digit setting (0 to 1,
DA2 gain -10.00 to +10.00 1.00
as above)
The above function codes are generally used for correcting the zero drift of analog To define the output logic for output terminal SPA, SPB, relay 1, relay 2 and expansion
output and the deviation of output amplitude. It also be used to custom analog output curve. DO .
If b represents the zero-bias, k represents he gain, Y represents the actual output and X 0: positive logic
represents standard output, then the actual output: It is active status when the digital output terminal is connected with the corresponding
Y=kX＋b。 Which, 100% the zero-bias coefficient of DA1, DA2 corresponds to 10V common terminal, inactive when disconnected;
( or 20mA), the standard output indicates the analog output amount corresponding to output 1: anti-logic
0V to 10V (or 0mA to 20mA) without zero bias and gain correction. It is inactive status when the digital output terminal is connected with the corresponding
For example: if the analog output is the operation frequency, it is expected to output 8V common terminal, active when disconnected;
with 0 frequency, and output 3V with maximum frequency, then the gain shall be set to “-
0.50”, zero-bias shall be set to o"80%".
SPB switching quantity 0.0s to 3600.0s 5-2-8.Start and stop control: U6.00-U6.15
U5.17 0.0s ☆
output delay time Factory Change
Code Parameter name Setting range
U5.18 Relay 1 output delay time 0.0s to 3600.0s 0.0s ☆ setting Limit
Expansion DO output 0.0s to 3600.0s Direct startup 0
U5.19 0.0s ☆
delay time Speed tracking restart 1
U6.00 Start-up mode 0 ☆
U5.20 SPA output delay time 0.0s to 3600.0s 0.0s ☆ Pre-excitation start
(AC asynchronous 2
U5.21 Relay 2 output delay time 0.0s to 3600.0s 0.0s ☆
motor)
Set the delay time from occurrence to actual output for output terminal SPA, SPB, relay 0: Directly startup
1, relay 2 and expansion DO. If the start DC braking time is set to 0, the inverter starts running from the start
Units digit SPB frequency. If the start DC braking time is not set to 0, the inverter firstly performs DC
switching braking and then starts running from the start frequency. Applicable for the small inertia load
quantity and the application that the motor may rotate when starting.
DO output terminal active status 1: Speed tracking restart
U5.22 selection 0 ☆ The inverter firstly judges the speed and direction of motor, and then starts at the tracked
active status selection
Positive 0 motor frequency, smoothly starts the rotating motor without shocks. Applicable for the
logic momentary power cut and restart with high inertia loads. To ensure the performance of Speed
Anti-logic 1 Tracking Restart, it is required to accurately set the parameters of motor U1 group.
2: Asynchronous motor pre-excitation start
129 130
It is valid only for asynchronous motors, used to firstly create magnetic field before the current/pre-excitation
motor running. Please refer to the instructions of function code U6.05, U6.06 for pre- current
excitation current and pre-excitation time
Start DC braking
If the pre-excitation time is set to 0, the inverter will cancel the pre-excitation process, U6.06 0.0s to 100.0s 0.0s ★
time/pre-excitation time
and starts from the start frequency. If the pre-excitation time is not set to 0, the inverter will
firstly perform pre-excitation process and then starts so as to improve the dynamic response Start DC braking, generally is used to stop and then restart the motor. Pre-excitation is
performance of motor. used to create magnetic field for asynchronous motor and then start the motor to improve the
Start from stop 0 response speed.
frequency Start DC braking is only active when the start mode is the direct startup. The inverter
firstly performs DC braking at the set start DC braking current, after the start DC braking
U6.01 Speed tracking mode Start from zero speed 1 0 ★
time is passed, and then start running. If the DC braking time is set to 0, the inverter will
Start from maximum 2 directly start and neglect DC braking. The larger DC braking current, the greater braking
frequency force.
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
For the shortest time to complete the process of speed tracking, select the speed mode If the startup mode is the asynchronous motor pre-excitation start, the inverter firstly
for inverter tracking motor : creates magnetic field at the preset pre-excitation current, after the set pre-excitation time is
0: track downward from the frequency that power outage happens passed and then start running. If the pre-excitation time is set to 0, the inverter will directly
Usually select this mode. start and neglect pre-excitation.
1: track upward from 0 frequency Start DC braking current/pre-excitation current is the percentage of inverter rater
For the case that power outage is for longer time and then restarts. current.
2: track downward from maximum frequency
Linear acceleration 0
For the general power generation load.
and deceleration
U6.02 Speed tracking value 1 to 100 20 ☆ S curve acceleration 1
U6.07 Ac/deceleration mode 0 ★
When performing speed tracking restart, select speed tracking value. and deceleration A
The larger the parameter value, the faster tracking. But if the value is set to too large, S curve acceleration 2
which may cause tracking unreliable. and deceleration B
U6.03 Start frequency 0.00Hz to 10.00Hz 0.00Hz ☆ Select the frequency change mode in the process of start/stop.
0: Linear acceleration and deceleration
U6.04 Hold time for start 0.0s ★ The output frequency increases or decreases linearly. PI9000 provides four kinds of
0.0s to 100.0s
frequency acceleration and deceleration time. You can select by the multi-function digital input
When the inverter starts, firstly run at the start frequency, the running time is the hold terminals (U4.00 to U4.08).
time for start frequency, afterwards run at the frequency reference. 1: S curve acceleration and deceleration A
The start frequency U6.03 is not limited by the lower limit frequency. But if the set The output frequency increases or decreases at the S curve. S-curve is used for the
target frequency is less than the start frequency, the inverter does not start and keeps in the occasion that requires to gently start or stop, such as elevators, conveyor belts, etc.. The
standby state. function code U6.08 and U6.09 respectively defined the proportion of S curve start-section
The hold time for start frequency is inactive when switching between forward rotation and the proportion of S curve end-section
and reverse rotation The hold time for start frequency is not included in the acceleration time, 2: S curve acceleration and deceleration B
but the simple PLC run-time. Example 1: In the mode of S curve acceleration and deceleration B, the motor rated frequency fb is
U0.03＝0 the frequency source is set to digital reference always the inflection point of S curve. Usually used for the occasion of high-speed regional
U0.08＝2.00Hz the digital set frequency is 2.00Hz above the rated frequency that requires rapid acceleration and deceleration.
U6.03＝5.00Hz the start frequency is 5.00Hz Proportion of S curve
U6.04＝2.0s the hold time for start frequency is 2.0s, at this time, the inverter will U6.08 0.0% to (100.0% to U6.09) 30.0% ★
start-section
be in the standby state with the output frequency of 0.00Hz.
Example 2: U6.09 Proportion of S curve 30.0% ★
end-section 0.0% to (100.0% to U6.08)
U0.03＝0 the frequency source is set to digital reference
U0.08＝10.00Hz the digital set frequency is 10.00Hz
U6.03＝5.00Hz the start frequency is 5.00Hz
U6.04＝2.0s the hold time for start frequency is 2.0s
At this point, the inverter accelerates to 5.00Hz for 2.0s, and then accelerates to the
reference frequency of 10.00Hz.
U6.05 Start DC braking 0% to 100% 0% ★
131 132
deceleration time and mode.

1: Free stop mode
When the inverter receives the "stop" command, it immediately stops output and the
Output frequency(Hz) motor freely run until stop under the action of inertia.
输出频率 Hz
U6.11 Initial frequency of stop 0.00Hz to U0.10 0.00Hz ☆

设定频率
Set frequency (f) f
DC braking (maximum frequency)
U6.12 Waiting time of stop DC 0.0s ☆

0.0s to 100.0s
braking
U6.13 Stop DC braking current 0% to 100% 0% ☆
Time(t)
U6.14 Stop DC braking time 0.0s to 100.0s 0.0s ☆
时间t
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Initial frequency of stop DC braking: if the operating frequency is reduced to the initial
frequency when decelerating, DC braking process is started.
t1 t2 t1 t2
Waiting time of stop DC braking: if the operating frequency is reduced to the said initial
S曲线加减速 A 示意图 frequency, the inverter firstly stops output for some time, and then DC braking process is
Schematic diagram of S curve ac/deceleration A
started. In order to prevent overcurrent fault that DC braking may cause at the higher speeds.
Stop DC braking current: it indicates the percentage of the DC braking output current in
输出频率
Output frequency(Hz) the rated motor current. The larger this value, the stronger the DC braking effect, but the
Hz greater the heat of the motor and the inverter.
Stop DC braking time: If this value is 0, DC braking process is canceled. Please see the
设定频率 f
Set frequency (f) schematic diagram for the DC braking process.
Output
frequency Hz
额定频率
Rated frequency (fb) fb
Time(t)
时间t
T
S 曲线加减速B示意图 Initial
Schematic diagram of S curve ac/deceleration B frequency of
stop DC
braking
Time t
The function code U6.08 and U6.09 respectively defined the proportion of start-section
and the proportion of end-section for S curve acceleration and deceleration A，the two Effective
value of output
function code must meet: U6.08 + U6.09 ≤ 100.0%. voltage
In the Figure S-curve acceleration and deceleration A of, t1 is the time parameter Waiting time o f stop DC brakin g(t1 )
defined by U6.08, the slope of the output frequency variation during this period is gradually
increasing. T2 is the time parameter defined by U6.09, the slope of the output frequency
variation during the period is gradually changed to 0. Within the time between t1 and t2, the Stop DC
braking amount
slope of the output frequency variation is fixed, i.e. the linear acceleration and deceleration is
achieved in this interval,
Deceleration parking 0 Time t
U6.10 Stop mode 0 ☆
Free stop 1 Stop DC brakin g time(t2 )
When the inverter receives the "stop" command, the inverter will set up the motor stop Running comman d
mode according to the parameter. Schematic diagram of stop DC braking time

0: Deceleration parking mode
The inverter will decelerates to the lowest frequency until stop according to the set
133 134
U6.15 Dynamic braking 100%

0% to 100%
utilization rate 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Effective only for the inverter with built-in braking unit. Linear speed PID feedback
Due to the duty cycle of braking unit is adjusted, if the braking use rate is high, the duty Current power-on time (Hour) PLC stage
cycle of braking unit is high, the braking effect is stronger, but the inverter's bus voltage Current run time
(Min) High-speed pulse input (kHz )
frequency
fluctuation is larger during the braking process . Running fre quency
High-speed pulse input frequency (Hz ) 2(Hz)
Communication set value Remaining run time
Encoder feedback speed (Hz ) AI1 voltage before correction(V)

5-2-9.Keyboard and display: U7.00-U7.12
(Hz )
Master frequency A display AI2voltage before correction(V)
Factory Change
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Code Parameter name Setting range Auxiliary frequency B display (Hz )
Reserve
setting limits
STOP/RST key is
If the above parameters need to be displayed in operation, firstly set its position to 1, and
enabled only under 0 then set at U7.02 after converting the binary number to the hexadecimal number.
keyboard operation Running status display parameters, which is used to set the parameters that can be
U7.00 STOP/RESET key 1 ☆
mode viewed when the inverter is in operation.
functions
STOP/RST key is There are 32 parameters available for viewing, select desired status parameters according
enabled under any 1 to U7.01 U7.01, U7.02 binary parameter values, the display order starts from the lowest level
operation mode of U7.01.
Running status 0 0 0 0 to FFFF Stop status display 0000 to FFFF
U7.01 1F ☆ U7.03 33 ☆
display parameters parameters
1
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Set frequency
Length value (Hz )
D0 Output status Running frequency 1(Hz)
stage
PLC Bus voltage (V)
AI1 Voltage (V) Set frequency (Hz )
Load speed DI input status
AI2 Voltage (V) Bus voltage
(V)
PID setting DO output status
Output voltage
Reserve (V)
High-speed pulse input frequency (Hz ) AI1 voltage (V)
Count value Output current (A)
Reserve AI2 voltage (V)
Length value Output power (kW)
Reserve Reserve
Output torque
Load speed display (%)
Reserve Counter
PID Setting DI Input status (V)
If the above parameters need to be displayed on operation, firstly set its position to 1, and
If the above parameters need to be displayed in operation, firstly set its position to 1, and then set at U7.03 after converting the binary number to the hexadecimal number.
then set at U7.01 after converting the binary number to the hexadecimal number. Load speed display 0.0001 to 6.5000
0 0 0 0 to FFFF U7.04 1.0 ☆
Running status coefficient
U7.02 display parameters 0 ☆ When load speed needs to be displayed, adjust the inverter's output frequency and load
2 speed by using the parameter.
Inverter module 0.0℃ to 100.0℃
U7.05 radiator - ●
temperature
Display the inverter module IGBT temperature
The different models of the inverter module vary IGBT overtemperature protection
values.
135 136
Rectifier module 0.0℃ to 100.0℃ U8.01 Jog acceleration time 0.1s to 3600.0s 20.0s ☆
U7.06 radiator - ●
U8.02 Jog deceleration time 0.1s to 3600.0s 20.0s ☆
temperature
Defined the inverter's reference frequency and ac/deceleration time when jogging
Display the rectifier module temperature
In operation of Jog, the startup mode is fixed as direct startup mode (U6.00 = 0), the
The different models of the rectifier module vary overtemperature protection values.
shutdown mode is fixed as deceleration parking mode (U6.10 = 0).
U7.07 Total run time 0h to 65535h - ●
U8.03 Acceleration time 2 0.0s to 3600.0s - ☆
Display the total run time of inverter When the run time reaches the set time(U8.17), the
inverter's multi-function digital output function (12) outputs ON signal. U8.04 Deceleration time 2 0.0s to 3600.0s - ☆
U7.08 Part number Inverter product number - ● U8.05 Acceleration time 3 0.0s to 3600.0s - ☆
Software version Control panel software version U8.06 Deceleration time 3 0.0s to 3600.0s - ☆
U7.09 - ●
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
number number U8.07 - ☆
Acceleration time 4 0.0s to 3600.0s
0 decimal place 0
U8.08 Deceleration time 4 0.0s to 3600.0s - ☆
Decimal places for 1 decimal place 1 PI9000 provides 4 groups of deceleration time, respectively U0.17\U0.18 and the above
U7.10 0 ☆
load speed display 2 decimal places 2 3 groups of deceleration time.
The 4 groups of deceleration time are defined exactly the same, please refer to the
3 decimal places 3 instructions of U0.17 and U0.18. The 4 groups of deceleration time can be switched through
Decimal places for load speed display The below example illustrates the calculation of different combinations of the multi-function digital input terminal DI, please refer to the
load speed: instructions of function code U4.01 to U4.05 for the detailed methods .
If the load speed coefficient(U7.04) is 2.000, the number of decimal places of load 0.00Hz to maximum
U8.09 Jump frequency 1 0.00Hz ☆
speed(U7.10) is 2 (two decimal places), when the inverter operating frequency reaches frequency
40.00Hz, the load speed is : 40.00 * 2.000 = 80.00 (2 decimal places display) 0.00Hz to maximum
U8.10 Jump frequency 2 0.00Hz ☆
If the inverter is shutdown, the load speed displays the speed relative to the set frequency, frequency
that is the "set load speed". If the set frequency is 50.00Hz, the load speed under the state of 0.00Hz to maximum
shutdown: 50.00 * 2.000 = 100.00 (2 decimal places display) U8.11 Jump frequency range 0.00Hz ☆
frequency
Total power-on time Default 0 hours When the set frequency is in the jump frequency range, the actual operating frequency
U7.11 will run at the jump frequency close from the set frequency . The inverter can avoid
Setting range 0 to 65535 hours mechanical resonance point of load by setting jump frequency.
PI9000 can set two jump frequency points, if the two jump frequencies are set to 0, the
Display the total power-on time from the inverter leaving factory. jump frequency function will be canceled. For the principle schematic of jump frequency and
When the time reaches the set time(U8.17), the inverter's multi-function digital output its range, please refer to the following figure.
function (24) outputs ON signal.
输出频率 Hz
Output
Total power frequency
Default -
U7.12 consumption
Jump
Frequency
Setting range 0 to 65535 hours 跳跃频率2
跳跃频率幅度
range
Jump frequency 2 跳跃频率幅度
Display the total power consumption of inverter to date until now 跳跃频率1 跳跃频率幅度
Jump frequency 1 Jump frequency range
跳跃频率幅度
Time时间t
5-2-10.Auxiliary function: U8.00-U8.53
Factory Change 跳跃频率示意图
Code Parameter name Setting range Schematic diagram of jump frequency
setting Limit
U8.00 0.00Hz to U0.10 2.00Hz ☆ U8.12 Forward/reverse rotation 0.0s ☆

Jog running frequency 0.00s to 3000.0s
(maximum frequency) deadband
137 138
It is the waiting time that the inverter reaches zero speed when the parameter is used to arrival time
switch between forward and reverse rotation. Used to set the running time of inverter.
When the total power-on time(U7.07) reaches the set time, the inverter multifunction
输出频率 Hz digital DO outputs ON signal.
Output
frequency OFF 0
U8.18 Start protection 0 ☆
ON 1
Forward This parameter relates to the security features of the inverter
正转
If this parameter is set to 1 , and if the running command is active (e.g. the terminal
running command is closed before power-on) when the inverter is in power-on, the inverter
will not respond to the running command, you must firstly cancel the running command,
Time
时间t when the running command is active again, the inverter will respond.
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
In addition, if the parameter is set to 1, and if the running command is active when the
inverter resets fault, the inverter will not respond to the running command, you must firstly
cancel the running command in order to eliminate running protection status.
The parameter is set 1, you can prevent the danger caused by that the inverter
反转
死区时间 Reverse unknowingly responds to the running command in the event of power-on and fault reset.
Deadband
正反转死区时间示意图
Schematic diagram of the deadband of forwad and reverse
U8.19 Frequency detection value 0.00Hz to maximum 50.00Hz ☆
ti (FDT1) frequency
Allow 0 U8.20 Frequency detection 0.0% to 100.0% (FDT1 5.0% ☆
U8.13 Reverse rotation control 0 ☆ hysteresis value (FDT1) level)
Prohibit 1
The inverter's multifunction output DO will output ON signal when the operating
For certain production equipments, the reverse rotation may result in damage to the frequency is higher than the detected value, conversely DO output ON signal is canceled.
equipment, the function can disable the reverse rotation. The factory default allows reverse The above parameters is used to set the detected value of output frequency, and the
rotation. hysteresis value after the output is canceled. Of which, U8.20 is the percentage of the
Running at lower 0 hysteresis frequency in the detected value(U8.19). The below figure is the schematic diagram
limit frequency of FDT.
U8.14 Set frequency lower than 0 ☆
lower limit frequency mode Stop 1
Zero speed running 2
Output Hz
When the set frequency is lower than the lower limit frequency, THE inverter operating frequency
status can be selected through the parameter. PI9000 provides three modes of operation to FDT level FDT hysteresis value
meet the needs of a variety of applications. =U8.19*U8.20
U8.15 Droop control 0.00Hz to 10.00Hz 0.00Hz ☆
This function is generally used for the load distribution that multiple motors drag the
same one load.
The droop control means that the inverter output frequency is decreased as the load is Time t
increased, so that when multiple motors drag(work for)the same one load, each motor's
output frequency much drops, which can reduce the load of the motor to balance evenly
multiple motors' load . Frequency
arrival
This parameter means the decreased value of output frequency when the inverter outputs detection
the rated load. signal ON
(DO, relay)
U8.16 Setting cumulative power-on 0h ☆

0h to 65000h
arrival time Time
t
When the total power-on time(U7.11) reaches the time set by U8.16, the inverter
Schematic diagram of FDT level
multifunction digital DO outputs ON signal.
U8.17 Setting cumulative running 0h to 65000h 0h ☆
139 140
Frequency reaches detection 0.00 to 100% maximum Switching frequency point 0.00Hz to maximum
U8.21 0.0% ☆
width frequency U8.25 between acceleration time 1 frequency 0.00Hz ☆
and acceleration time 2
Output
输出频率Hz Switching frequency point 0.00Hz to maximum
Frequency
U8.26 between deceleration time 1 frequency 0.00Hz ☆
and deceleration time 2
设定频率
Set frequency
Detection amplitude
检出幅值 The function is active when motor 1 is selected and DI terminal is not selected to switch
between ac/deceleration. It is used to automatically select ac/deceleration time by not DI
terminal but the operating frequency range when the inverter is running.
输出
Output频率Hz
时间t
Frequency
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
频率到达 Set
Frequency 设定频
frequency 率
检测信号
reaches detection
signal ON
U8.25
ON
U8.26
时间t
Deceleration
频率到达检出幅值示意图 time 2
减速时间2
Schematic diagram of frequency arrival detection amplitude
加速时间1 减速时间1 减速时间2
加速时间2
Acceleration Acceleration Deceleration Deceleration
The inverter's multifunction output DO will output ON signal when the inverter's time 2 time 1 time 1 time 2
加减速时间切换示意图
operating frequency is in a certain range of target frequency Schematic diagram of switching between acceleration and deceleration
This parameter is used to set the frequency arrival detection range, the parameter is the
percentage of maximum frequency. The below figure is the schematic diagram of frequency For the above figure in the process of acceleration, if the operating frequency is less
arrival. than U8.25, select acceleration time 2; otherwise select acceleration time 2.
Jump frequency availability Invalid 0 For the above figure in the process of deceleration, if the operating frequency is more
U8.22 during ac/deceleration Valid 1 0 ☆ than U8.26, select deceleration time 1; otherwise select deceleration time 2.
process Invalid 0
U8.27 Terminal jog priority 0 ☆
The function code is used to set whether the jump frequency is active or not in the Valid 1
process of acceleration and deceleration.
This parameter is used to set whether the priority of terminal jog function is active or
If it is set to active, when the operating frequency is in the jump frequency range, the
actual operating frequency will skip the set jump frequency boundary. The below figure not.
below shows the jump frequency status in the process of acceleration and deceleration. When it is set to active, if the terminal jog command is received by inverter in operation,
the inverter will change to jog running status.
Frequency detection value 0.00Hz to U0.10
输出频率Hz
Output
U8.28 (maximum frequency) 50.00Hz ☆
Frequency (FDT2)
跳跃频率幅度 Frequency detection 0.0% to 100.0% (FDT2
跳跃频率2
Jump frequency 2
Jump frequency range
跳跃频率幅度 U8.29 level) 5.0% ☆
hysteresis value (FDT2)
The frequency detection function is same as FDT1 exactly, please refer to the
跳跃频率幅度
跳跃频率1
Jump frequency 1 Jump frequency range
跳跃频率幅度 instructions of FDT1 or function codes U8.19, U8.20.
Time U8.30 Random arrivals frequency 0.00Hz to U0.10 50.00Hz ☆

时间t detection value 1 (maximum frequency)
加减速过程中跳跃频率有效示意图 Random arrivals frequency 0.00% to 100.0%
Schematic diagram of jump frequency availability in the process of acceleration and deceleration. U8.31 0.0% ☆
detection width 1 (maximum frequency)
U8.32 0.00Hz to U0.10 50.00Hz ☆
Random arrivals frequency (maximum frequency)
141 142
detection value 2
When the inverter's output current is less than or equal to zero current detection level
Random arrivals frequency 0.00% to 100.0%
U8.33 0.0% ☆ and lasts for longer than the delay time of zero-current detection, the inverter's multifunction
detection width 2 (maximum frequency) DO will output ON signal. The figure is the schematic diagram of zero current detection.
0.0% (not detected)
Output U8.36 Overrun value of output 200.0% ☆
运行频率 0.1% to 300.0% (rated
Frequency current
motor current)
Output Current overrun 0.01s to 360.00s
频率检出宽度 U8.37 0.00s ☆
Random arrivals 任意到达频率
frequency Frequency detection width detection delay time
频率检出宽度 Output current
Time
时间t
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Overrun value of output current
U8.36
ON ON
Random arrivals任意到达频率
frequency
检测信号DO或 OFF OFF OFF
detection signal DO or
继电器
relay 任意到达频率检测示意图
Schematic diagram of random arrivals frequency detection
Time t
When the inverter's output frequency randomly reaches the range of the detected
value(positive or negative), the multi-function DO will output ON signal. Output current overrun detection signal
PI9000 provides two groups of parameter to set frequency value and frequency
ON
detection range. The below figure is the schematic diagram of the function.
0.0% to 300.0% (rated
U8.34 Zero current detection level 5.0% ☆ Time t
motor current) Output current overrun detection delay time
U8.37
U8.35 Zero current detection delay 0.01s to 360.00s 0.10s ☆
Schematic diagram of output current overrun detection signal
time
When the inverter's output current is more than or overrun the detection point and lasts
Output current
for longer than the delay time of software overcurrent point detection, the inverter's
multifunction DO will output ON signal.
U8.38 Random arrivals current 1 0.0% to 300.0% (rated 1000 ☆
motor current)
U8.39 Random arrivals current 1 0.0% to 300.0% (rated 0.0% ☆
Zero current detection level width motor current)
U8.34 0.0% to 300.0% (rated
U8.40 Random arrivals current 2 1000 ☆
motor current)
Time t
U8.41 Random arrivals current 2 0.0% to 300.0% (rated 0.0% ☆
width motor current)
Zero current detection
signal
ON When the inverter's output current randomly reaches the range of the current detection
width(positive or negative), the inverter multifunction DO will output ON signal.
PI9000 provides two group of sets of parameter for Randomly Reaches Current and
Detection Width, the figure is the functional diagram.
Time
t
Zero current detection delay time

U8.35
Output current
143 144
输出电流 when running
Fan always
running 1
任意到达电流宽度
Random arrivals
任意到达电流
Random arrivals current Used to select the cooling fan mode, if you select 0, the fan will run when the inverter is
任意到达电流宽度
current width
running, but in the stop state of inverter, if the radiator temperature is above 40 degrees, the
fan will run, otherwise the fan will not run.
If you select 1, when the fan will always running after power-on.
Time
时间t U8.53 Current running arrival time. 0.0Min to 3600.0Min 0.0Min ☆
When current running time reaches this time, the inverter multi-function digital DO will
output"Current Running Time Arrival "ON signal.
Random arrivals current ON ON ON
任意到达电流检测
detection signal DO or relay
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
信号DO或继电器
OFF OFF OFF
5-2-11.Fault and protection:U9.00-U9.70
任意到达电流检测示意图
Schematic diagram of random arrivals current detection
Parameter Factory Change
Code Setting range
name setting limits
Motor Prohibit 0
Invalid 0 U9.00 overload 1 ☆
U8.42 Timing function selection 0 ☆ protection Allow 1
Valid 1
U8.44 setting 0 0 Motor
overload
AI1 1 U9.01 0.20 to 10.00 1.00 ☆
1 protection
AI2 2 gain
2
U8.43 Timing run time selection ☆ U9.00 = 0: no motor overload protection function, there may be the risk of damage to
Panel
3 3 the motor due to overheating, it is recommended that the thermal relay is installed between
potentiometer
the inverter and the motor;
Analog input range 100% U9.00 = 1: the inverter will determine whether the motor is overloaded or not according
corresponds to U8.44 to the inverse time curve of motor overload protection. Inverse time curve of motor overload
U8.44 Timing run time 0.0Min to 3600.0Min 0.0Min ☆ protection: 220% x (U9.01) x rated motor current, if this lasts for 1 minute, the alarm of
motor will be prompted.
The group of parameters are used to complete the inverter timing run function.
Overload fault; 150% x (U9.01) × rated motor current, if this lasts for 60 minute, the
If U8.42 timing function is active, the inverter starts as the timer starts, when the set
alarm of motor overload will be prompted.
timing run time is reached, the inverter automatically shut down, at the same time the multi-
User shall correctly set the value of U9.01 according to the actual motor overload
function DO will output ON signal. capacity, if the value is set to too large , which may easily lead to motor overheating and
Every time the inverter starts, the timer will time from 0, the remaining time can be damage while the inverter will not alarm!
viewed by U0.20. The timing run time is set by U8.43, U8.44 in minute.
Motor
U8.45 AI1 input voltage protection 3.10V ☆
0.00V to U8.46 U9.02 overload 80% ☆
lower limit 50% to 100%
pre-alarm
AI1 input voltage protection 6.80V ☆ coefficient
U8.46 U8.45 to 10.00V
upper limit This function is used in the front of motor overload fault protection, and sends a pre-
When analog AI1 input is greater than U8.46, or when AI1 input is less than U8.47, the alarm signal to the control system by DO. The warning coefficient is used to determine the
inverter multi-functional DO will output "AI1 input overrun"signal, so as to indicate whether extent of pre-alarm prior to motor overload protection. The higher the value, the smaller the
the AI1 input voltage is within the set range or not. extent of pre-alarm in advance.
U8.47 Module temperature arrival 0.00 to 100 75℃ ☆ When the cumulative amount of inverter output current is greater than the product of the
inverse time curve of overload and U9.02, the inverter multi-function digital DO will output
When the inverter radiator temperature reaches the temperature, the inverter "Motor Overload Pre-Alarm" ON signal.
multifunction DO will output "Module Temperature Arrival" ON signal.
U9.03 Overvoltage 0 (no overvoltage stall) to 100 0 ☆
U8.48 Cooling fan control Fan running only 0 0 ☆
145 146
stall gain automatic

fault reset
Overvoltage
stall When the inverter selects automatic fault reset, it is used to set the number of times of
protection automatic fault reset. If the set number of times is exceeded, the inverter remains a failed
voltage / state.
U9.04 120% to 150%(three-phase) 130% ☆
energy Fault DO OFF 0
consumption action
brake selection
U9.10 1 ☆
voltage during ON 1
In the process of the inverter deceleration, when the DC bus voltage exceeds the automatic
overvoltage stall protection voltage/the energy consumption brake voltage, the inverter stops fault reset
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
deceleration and maintains at the current operating frequency(if U6.15 is not set to 0, the If the inverter automatic fault reset function is set, U9.09 can be used to set whether DO
braking signal is outputted the energy consumption brake can be implemented by an external action is active or not during the automatic fault reset
braking resistor.) and then continues to decelerate upon decline of the bus voltage Automatic
Overvoltage stall gain is used for adjusting inhibition overvoltage capability during U9.11 fault reset 0.1s to 100.0s 1.0s ☆
deceleration. The greater this value, the stronger inhibition overvoltage capability Under the interval
premise that the overvoltage does not occur, the best is the smaller gain setting.
For the small inertia load, the overvoltage stall gain should be small, otherwise which It is the waiting time from the inverter fault alarm to automatic fault reset.
cause the slower system dynamic response. For the big inertia load, the overvoltage stall gain Input phase Prohibit 0
should be large, otherwise the poor inhibitory effect may cause overvoltage fault. loss
When the overvoltage stall gain is set to 0, the overvoltage stall function will be U9.12 1 ☆
protection Allow 1
canceled. selection
U9.05 Overcurrent 20 ☆ Select whether the input phase loss protection is done or not.
0 to 100
stall gain The input phase loss protection function is only for PI9000 G type inverter with 18.5kW
Overcurrent or above, not for the F type inverter with 18.5kW or below and however U9.12 is set to 0 or
stall 1.
U9.06 100% to 200% 150% ☆ Prohibit 0
protection Output
current U9.13 phase loss ☆
1
In the process of the inverter acceleration, when the output current exceeds the protection Allow 1
overcurrent stall protection current, the inverter stops ac/deceleration process and remains in selection
the current operating frequency, and then continues to ac/decelerate upon the decline of the Select whether the output phase loss protection is done or not.
output current.
Overcurrent stall gain is used for adjusting inhibition overcurrent capability during U9.14 Type of the - ●
0 to 51
ac/deceleration. The greater this value, the stronger inhibition overcurrent capability Under first fault
the premise that the overcurrent does not occur, the best is the smaller gain setting. Type of the
For the small inertia load, the overcurrent stall gain should be small, otherwise which
U9.15 0 to 51 - ●
second fault
cause the slower system dynamic response. For the big inertia load, the overcurrent stall gain
should be large, otherwise the poor inhibitory effect may cause overvoltage fault. Type of the
When the overcurrent stall gain is set to 0, the overcurrent stall function will be U9.16 third(at last) 0 to 51 - ●
canceled. fault
Power-on Invalid 0 Record the type of the last three faults of inverter, 0 for no fault. Please refer to the
U9.07 short circuit 1 ☆ related instructions for the possible causes and solutions for each fault code.
Valid 1 Failure type table:
to ground
You can detect whether the motor is shorted to ground when the inverter is powered on. No. Failure type
If this function is active, the inverter's UVW terminal will output voltage after power-on 0 No fault
for a while. 1 Reserve
U9.09 Number of 0 to 20 0 ☆ 2 Acceleration overcurrent
147 148
3 Deceleration overcurrent 40 Fast current limiting

4 Constant speed timeout
overcurrent 41 Switch motor when
5 Acceleration running
overvoltage 42 Too large speed
6 Deceleration deviation
overvoltage 43 Motor overspeed
7 Constant speed 45 Motor overtemperature
overvoltage 51 Initial position error
8 Buffer resistance
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
overload
Frequency Frequency of the last fault
U9.17 of the third ●
9 Undervoltage fault
10 Inverter overload Current of Current of the last fault
11 Motor Overload U9.18 the third ●
12 Input phase loss fault
Bus voltage Bus voltage of the last fault
13 Output phase loss U9.19 ●
of the third
14 Module overheating fault
15 External fault Input terminal status of the last fault, the order is:
16 Communication B IT9 BIT8 B IT7 BIT6 BIT5 BIT4 B IT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0
Input
abnormal terminal DI0 DI9 DI8 DI7 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1
17 Contactor abnormal U9.20 ●

status of the When the input terminal is ON, the corresponding
18 Current detection third fault binary bits is 1, OFF is 0, all DI status is converted
abnormal to the decimal number for display.
19 Motor auto tunning Output terminal status of the last fault, the order is:
abnormal
BIT4 BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0
20 Encoder/PG card Output
REL2 SP Re serveREL1 SPB
abnormal terminal
U9.21 A
●
status of the
21 Parameter read and write When the input terminal is ON, the corresponding
third fault
abnormal binary bits is 1, OFF is 0, all DI status is converted
22 Inverter hardware to the decimal number for display.
abnormal Inverter Reserve
23 Motor short to ground U9.22 status of the ●
24 Reserve third fault
25 Reserve Power-on Current power-on time of the last fault
U9.23 time of the ●
26 Running time arrival third fault
27 Custom fault 1 Running Current running time of the last fault
28 Custom fault 2 U9.24 time of the ●
29 Power-on time arrival third fault
Frequency Frequency of the last fault
30 Load drop U9.27 ●
of the
31 PID feedback loss when second fault
running
149 150
Current of Current of the last fault terminal

U9.28 the second ● status of the
fault first fault BIT4 BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0
Bus voltage Bus voltage of the last fault REL2 SPA Reser ve REL1 SPB
U9.29 of the ●
second fault
When the input terminal is ON, the corresponding
Input terminal status of the last fault, the order is:
binary bits is 1, OFF is 0, all DI status is converted
B IT9 BIT8 B IT7 BIT6 BIT5 BIT4 B IT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0
Input to the decimal number for display.
DI0 DI9 DI8 DI7 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1
U9.30 terminal ●
status of the When the input terminal is ON, the corresponding Inverter Reserve
U9.42 status of the ●
second fault binary bits is 1, OFF is 0, all DI status is converted first fault
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
to the decimal number for display. Power-on Current power-on time of the last fault
Output terminal status of the last fault, the order is: U9.43 time of the ●
first fault
Running Current running time of the last fault
Output BIT4 BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0 U9.44 time of the ●
U9.31 terminal REL2 SPA Reserve REL1 SPB
● first fault
status of the Motor overload
second fault When the input terminal is ON, the corresponding Units digit 00000
(Fault ID Err.11)
binary bits is 1, OFF is 0, all DI status is converted Free stop 0
to the decimal number for display.
Stop at the selected mode 1
Inverter Reserve
U9.32 ● Continue to run 2
status of the
second fault Tens digit Input phase
Power-on Current power-on time of the last fault loss(Fault ID
U9.33 time of the ● Err.12)(same as
second fault Fault units digit)
Running Current running time of the last fault U9.47 protection Hundreds digit Output phase ☆
U9.34 ● action loss(Fault ID
time of the
selection 1 Err.13)(same as
second fault
Frequency Frequency of the last fault units digit)
U9.37 of the first ● Thousands digit External
fault fault(Fault ID
Current of Current of the last fault Err.15)(same as
U9.38 the first ● units digit)
fault Ten thousands Communication
Bus voltage Bus voltage of the last fault digit abnormal(Fault
U9.39 of the first ● ID Err.16)(same
fault as units digit)
Input terminal status of the last fault, the order is: Encoder
Units digit fault(Fault ID 00000
B IT9 BIT8 B IT7 BIT6 BIT5 BIT4 B IT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0
Input Fault Err.20)
DI0 DI9 DI8 DI7 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1
U9.40 terminal ● protection Free stop 0
status of the When the input terminal is ON, the corresponding U9.48 ☆
action Switch to VF and then
first fault binary bits is 1, OFF is 0, all DI status is converted selection 2 1
stop at the selected mode
to the decimal number for display. Switch to VF and 2
U9.41 ● continue to run
Output Output terminal status of the last fault, the order is:
151 152
Tens digit Function code read action as U9.47 units

and write selection 4 digit)
abnormal(Fault ID Tens digit Motor
Err.21) overspeed(Fault
Free stop 0 ID Err.43)( same
as U9.47 units
Stop at the selected mode 1 digit)
Hundreds digit Reserve Hundreds digit Initial position
Thousands digit Motor error(Fault ID
overheating(Fault Err.51)( same as
ID Err.45)( same U9.47 units digit)
as U9.47 units Thousands digit Reserve
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
digit) Ten thousands
Ten thousands Running time Reserve
digit
digit arrival(Fault ID When "free stop" is selected, the inverter displays Err. *, and directly stops.
Err.26)( same as When "Stop at the selected mode" is selected, the inverter displays Arr. *, firstly stops at
U9.47 units digit) the selected mode and then displays Err. * When "continue to run" is selected, the inverter
Custom fault 1 continues to run and displays Arr. *, the operating frequency is set by U9.54.
(Fault ID Running at current
Units digit Err.27)( same as 0
frequency
U9.47 units digit) Continue
Running at set frequency 1
Tens digit Custom fault 2 running
(Fault ID frequency Running at upper limit
U9.54 2 0 ☆
Err.28)( same as selection frequency
00000 Running at lower limit
U9.47 units digit) when failure 3
Power-on time happens frequency
Hundreds digit
arrival(Fault ID Running at abnormal
4
Err.29)( same as spare frequency
U9.47 units digit) Abnormal
Thousands digit Load drop(Fault U9.55 spare 60.0% to 100.0% 1000 ☆
Fault
ID Err.30) frequency
protection
U9.49 0 ☆ When the inverter occurs faults during operation, and the troubleshooting mode for the
action Free stop
selection 3 fault is set to "continue to run", the inverter displays Arr. *, and runs at the operating
Stop at the selected mode 1 frequency set by U9.54.
Decelerate to 7% of the When "abnormal spare frequency" is selected, the value set by U9.55 is the percentage
rated frequency of motor of the maximum frequency
and continue to run, Invalid 0
Momentary
automatically return to 2
U9.59 power cut Deceleration 1 0 ☆
the set frequency to run if action
the load drop does not selection Deceleration and stop 2
happen.
PID feedback Frequency
loss when switching
Ten thousands points for
running(Fault ID U9.60 0.0% to 100.0% 90% ☆
digit momentary
Err.31)( same as
U9.47 units digit) power cut
Units digit Too large speed deceleration
U9.50 Fault 00000 ☆
deviation(Fault Recovery
protection
ID Err.42)( same U9.61 0.00s to 100.00s 0.50s ☆
voltage
153 154
judgment time by U9.61.

time of If U9.59 = 2, when the momentary power cut happens or the voltage suddenly reduces,
momentary the inverter will decelerate till to stop.
power cut Load drop Invalid 0
Judgment U9.63 protection Valid 1 0 ☆
voltage of selection
U9.62 60.0% to 100.0% (standard bus 80.0% ☆
momentary Load drop
voltage)
power cut U9.64 detection 0.0% to 100.0% (rated motor current) 10.0% ☆
no action level
Recovery voltage judgment time
of momentary power cut
U9.61
Load drop
U9.65 detection 0.0s to 60.0s Target amount 1.0s ☆
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Bus voltage
level
Judgment voltage of
momentary power cut action
If the load drop protection function is active, when the inverter output current is less
U9.62 than the load drop detection level (U9.64)and the duration is longer than the load drop
detection time(U9.65), the inverter output frequency is automatically reduced to 7% of the
Time
rated frequency. During the load drop protection, if the load recovers, the inverter
t automatically resumes to the set frequency to run.
Overspeed
U9.67 0.00% to 50.0% (maximum 15.0% ☆
Running frequency
detection
frequency)
value
Overspeed
Frequency switching points for
momentary power cut deceleration (U9.59=1deceleration
: ) U9.68 detection 0.0s to 60.0s 2.0s ☆
U9.60
time
This feature is only available when the inverter runs with speed sensor vector control.
When the inverter detects that the actual motor speed exceeds the set frequency, and the
Time
t excess is greater than the overspeed detection value(P9.67), and the duration is greater than
the overspeed detection time(P9.68) the inverter will alarm fault ID Err.43, and troubleshoots
Deceleration time Deceleration time Recovery acceleration time
according to the protection action.
Running frequency
3 4
Detection
U9.69 value for too 0.00% to 50.0% (maximum 20.0% ☆
Frequency switching points for
momentary power cut deceleration
large speed frequency)
U9.60 deviation
(U9.59=2Deceleration
:and stop )
Detection
U9.70 time for too 2.0s ☆
0.0s to 60.0s
Time
large speed
t
deviation
Deceleration time Deceleration time
3 4
Schematic diagram of U momentary power cut action

This feature means that when the momentary power cut happens or the voltage suddenly
reduces, the drive will reduce the output speed to compensate the reduced value of the
inverter DC bus voltage by using load feedback energy, in order to maintain the inverter to
continue running.
If U9.59 = 1, when the momentary power cut happens or the voltage suddenly reduces,
the inverter will decelerate, when the bus voltage is back to normal, the inverter will
normally accelerate to the set frequency to run. To determine whether the bus voltage returns
to normal or not, check whether the bus voltage is normal and lasts for longer than the set
155 156
PID keyboard
UA.01 0.0% to 100.0% 50.0% ☆
reference
1 1 This parameter is used to select the process PID target value reference channel.
Ti S The set target value of process PID is a relative value, the setting range is from 0.0% to
100.0%. The feedback value of PID is also a relative value, the role of PID is to remain the
+
Td*s+1 P same for the two relative values.
Target - PID output control AI1 0
amount amount
AI2 1
1
Panel
Feedback amount potentiometer 2
setting
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Flow diagram of process PID principle AI1－AI2 3
PID feedback
UA.02 High-speed pulse 0 ☆
source 4
This feature is only available when the inverter runs with speed sensor vector control. setting
When the inverter detects that the actual motor speed is different from the set frequency, Communications
5
and the deviation is greater than the detection value for too large speed deviation(P9.69), and setting
the duration is greater than the detection time for too large speed deviation(P9.70), the AI1+AI2 6
inverter will alarm fault ID Err.42, and troubleshoots according to the protection action.
If the detection time for too large speed deviation is 0.0s, the detection for too large MAX(|AI1|, |AI2|) 7
speed deviation is canceled. MIN (|AI1|, |AI2|) 8
This parameter is used to select the process PID feedback signal channel.
The feedback value of process PID is also a relative value, the setting range is from
5-2-12.PID function: UA.00-UA.28 0.0% to 100.0%.
PID control is a commonly used method of process control, a closed loop system is PID action Positive 0
formed by the proportional, integral and differential operation of difference between the UA.03 0 ☆
direction Negative 1
controlled value feedback signal and target value signal and by adjusting the inverter Positive: When PID feedback signal is less than a reference value, the inverter output
output frequency so as to stabilize the controlled value at the position of the target value. frequency will rise. Such as rewinding tension control applications.
Suitable for flow control, pressure control and temperature control and other Negative: When PID feedback signal is less than a reference value, the inverter output
process control applications. frequency will drop. Such as unwinding tension control applications. This feature is affected
by the negated PID action direction of multi-function terminals (function 35), please use with
Factory Change
Code Parameter name Setting range caution.
setting limits
UA.04 PID reference 1000 ☆
UA.01 setting 0 0 to 65535
feedback range
Analog AI1 1 PID reference feedback range is a dimensionsless unit for PID setting display(d0.15)
reference and PID feedback display(d0.16).
Analog AI2 2 The 100.0% of the relative value of PID reference feedback corresponds to a setting
reference feedback range(UA.04). If UA.04 is set to 2000, when PID setting is 100.0%, PID setting
Panel display(d0.15) will be 2000.
PID reference potentiometer 3
UA.00 0 ☆` Proportional gain
source reference UA.05 0.0 to 100.0 20.0 ☆
KP1
High-speed pulse 4
setting UA.06 Integration time Ti1 0.01s to 10.00s 2.00s ☆
Communications 5 Differential time
setting UA.07 0.00 to 10.000 0.000s ☆
Td1
Multi-stage 6 Proportional gain KP1:
command setting Used to decide the extent of the PID regulator, the greater KP1, the greater adjusting
157 158
extent. This parameter 100.0 means that when the deviation of PID feedback value and UA.16 Integration time Ti2 0.01s to 10.00s 2.00s ☆
reference value is 100.0%, the PID regulator will adjust the output frequency command to the
maximum frequency. Differential time
UA.17 0.00 to 10.000 0.000s ☆
Integration time Ti1: used to decide the extent of integral adjustment of the PID Td2
regulator. The shorter integration time, the greater extent of integral adjustment The No switching 0
integration time means that when the deviation of PID feedback value and reference value is
100.0%, the integration regulator will successively adjust to the maximum frequency for the Switching
time. PID parameter through DI 1
Differential time Td1: used to decide the extent that the PID regulator adjusts the UA.18 switching terminal 0 ☆
deviation change rate. The longer differential time, the greater extent of adjustment The conditions Automatically
differential time means that the feedback value changes 100.0% within the time, the switching
2
differential regulator will adjust to the maximum frequency. according to
deviation.
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
UA.08
PID inversion 0 ． 00 to U0.10(maximum 2.00Hz ☆
cutoff frequency frequency) PID parameter
UA.19 switching deviation 0.0% to UA.20 20.0% ☆
In some cases, only when the PID output frequency is negative (i.e.the inverter
1
reverses), PID can control the reference value and the feedback value to the same states, but
the excessive inversion frequency is not allowed in some occasions, UA.08 is used to the PID parameter
upper limit of determine inversion frequency. UA.20 switching deviation UA.19 to 100.0% 80.0% ☆
UA.09 PID deviation limit 0.0% to 100.0% 0.01% ☆ 2
When the deviation between PID reference value and PID feedback value is less than In some applications, only one group of PID parameters can not meet the needs of the
UA.09, PID will stop regulating action. Thus, when the deviation is lesser, the output entire run, it is required to use different PID parameters under different conditions.
frequency will be stable, it is especially effective for some closed-loop control occasions. This group of function codes is used to switch between two groups of PID parameters.
Which the setting method for regulator parameter(UA.15 to UA.17) is similar to the
UA.10 PID differential 0.10% ☆ parameter(UA.05 to UA.07).
0． 00% to 100.00%
limiting The two groups of PID parameters can be switched by the multi-functional digital DI
The role of the differential is more sensitive in PID regulator, is likely to cause system terminal, can also be switched automatically according to the PID deviation.
oscillation, generally the role is limited to a smaller range, UA.10 is used to set PID If you select the multi-functional DI terminal, the multi-function terminal function
differential output range. selection shall be set to 43 (PID parameter switching terminal), select parameter group 1
PID reference (UA.05 UA.07) when the terminal is inactive, otherwise select parameter group 2 (UA.15 to
UA.11 0.00s to 650.00s 0.00s ☆ UA.17).
change time
If you select the automatic switch mode, and when the absolute value of deviation
The PID reference change time means the required time that PID reference value
between reference and feedback parameters is less than PID parameter switching deviation
changes from 0.0% to 100.0%.
1(UA.19), select parameter group 1 for PID parameter. When the absolute value of deviation
When the PID reference changes, the PID reference value will change linearly according
to the reference change time to reduce the adverse effects to the system caused by a sudden between reference and feedback parameters is more than PID parameter switching deviation
2(UA.20), select parameter group 2 for PID parameter. If the deviation between reference
reference change.
and feedback parameters is between switching deviation 1 and switching deviation 2, PID
PID feedback filter
UA.12 0.00s to 60.00s 0.00s ☆ parameter is the linear interpolation of the two groups of PID parameters , as shown in the
time figure.
UIIparameter
UA.13 PID output filter 0.00s ☆
0.00s to 60.00s
time
UA.12 is used for filtering the PID feedback quantity, the filter helps reduce the PID parameter1
UA.05 UA.06 UA.07
influence of interference to the feedback quantity, but will bring the response performance of
the process closed loop system. parameter
PID 2
UA.13 is used for filtering the PID output frequency, the filter will weaken the sudden UA.15 UA.16 UA.17
change of the inverter output frequency, but it will also bring the response performance of the
process closed loop system.
UA.15 Proportional gain 20.0 ☆ UA.19 UA.20 PID deviation

KP2 0.0 to 100.0 PID parameter switching
159 160
Integral separation:
If the integral separation is set to active, when the integral pause of multifunction digital
UA.21 PID initial value 0.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆ DI(function 22) is active, PID integral will stop operations, at the time only the proportional
PID initial value and derivative actions of PID is active.
UA.22 0.00s to 360.00s 0.00s ☆ If the integral separation is set to inactive, however the multifunction digital DI is active
hold time
or inactive, the integral separation will be inactive. Whether stop integration when output
When the inverter starts, PID output is fixed at PID initial value(UA.21), and then
reaches limit: you can select whether or not to stop the integral action after PID operation
continuous for the PID initial value hold time(UA.22), at last PID begins operation of the
output reaches the maximum or the minimum value If you select to stop the integral action,
closed-loop adjustment.
the PID integral will stop the calculation, which may help to reduce the overshoot of PID.
The figure is functional schematic of PID initial value.
PID feedback loss 0.0%: not judged feedback loss
Output frequency UA.26 0.0% ☆
Hz detection value 0.1% to 100.0%
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
PID feedback loss
PID
initial value UA.27 0.0s to 20.0s 1.0s ☆
UA.21
detection time
This function code is used to determine whether the PID feedback is lost or not.
When the PID feedback is less than the PID feedback loss detection value(UA.26), and
the duration is longer than the PID feedback loss detection time(UA.27), the inverter will
alarm fault ID Err.31, and troubleshoot according to the selected method.
Stop without
Time
t Computing status 0
UA.28 computing 0 ☆
PIDinitial value hold time UA.22 after PID stop
Stop with computing 1
Functional schematic of PID initial value.
Used to select whether to continue computing in the state of PID shutdown. Generally,
PID will stop computing in the state of shutdown.
This function is used to limit the deviation between two PID output beats(2ms/beats), in
order to suppress the too fast changes of PID output so that stabilizing the inverter operation.
Maximum 5-2-13.Wobbulate, fixed-length and counting:Ub.00-Ub.09
UA.23 deviation of twice 0.00% to 100.00% 1.00% ☆
Wobbulate function is suitable for the textile, chemical, and other industries, as
outputs(forward)
well as occasions that needs traverse and winding function. Wobbulate function means
Maximum that the inverter output frequency swings up and down to set the frequency centering
UA.24 deviation of twice 0.00% to 100.00% 1.00% ☆
outputs(backward) around the set frequency, the locus the operating frequency on the timeline is as shown
UA.23 and UA.24 respectively corresponds to the maximum of the absolute value of
in figure, which the swing amplitude is set by Ub.00 and Ub.01, when Ub.01 is set to 0,
output deviation when rotating forward and reverse. the wobbulate will not work.
Units digit Integral 00
separation
Invalid 0
Valid 1
Tens digit Whether
PID integral stop
UA.25 integration ☆
properties
when
output
reaches
limit
Continue 0
Stop 1
161 162
Ub.03 Wobbulate cycle 0.1s to 3000.0s 10.0s ☆

Wobbulate range
Ub.04 Triangle wave rise 0 ☆
Output frequency HZ
0.0% to 50.0%
Wobbulate upper limit frequency
+AW
AW=F set*UB.01
time coefficient
Wobbulate cycle: the time of a complete wobbulate cycle.
Center frequency(Fset) Triangle wave rise time coefficient(Ub.04), the time percentage of Riangle Wave Rise
-AW
Time relative to Wobbulate Cycle(Ub.03) Triangle wave rise time = Wobbulate cycle(Ub.03)
× Triangle wave rise time coefficient(Ub.04), unit: second(s). Triangle wave drop time =
Wobbulate lower limit frequency
Wobbulate cycle(Ub.03) × (1 - Triangle wave rise time coefficient(Ub.04)), unit: second(s).

Textile jump frequency
Ub.05 Set length 0m to 65535m 1000m ☆

=AW* UB.02
Ub.06 Actual length 0m to 65535m 0m ☆
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
☆
Time t
Accelerate at the acceleration time Wobbulate cycle Decelerate at the deceleration time
Ub.07 Pulse per meter 0.1 to 6553.5 100.0
Triangle wave rise time
The above function codes are used to fixed-length control.
Running command The length information is sampled through the multi-function digital input terminal, the
Schem atic di agram of wobbul ate op erating
pulse number sampled by terminal divides the pulse per meter(Ub.07), so then the actual
length(Ub.06) can be computed out. When the actual length is greater than the set length
(Ub.05), the multi-functional digital DO will output "Length Arrival" ON signal.
During the fixed-length control, the multifunction DI terminal can be used to reset length
Factory Change (DI function selects 28), please refer to U4.00 to U4.09 for details.
Code Parameter name Setting range setting limits In some applications, the related input terminal function shall be set to "Length Count
Relative to center Input"(function 27), when the pulse frequency is higher, DI5 port must be used .
0 Ub.08 1000 ☆
frequency Set count value 1 to 65535
Ub.00 Swing setting 0 ☆
Relative to
manner Ub.09 Specified count 1000 ☆
maximum 1 1 to 65535
value
frequency
This parameter is used to determine the baseline of the swing The count value needs to be sampled through the multi-function digital input terminal. In
0: relative to center frequency(U0.07 frequency source) some applications, the related input terminal function shall be set to "Counter Input"(function
For the variable swing system. The swing varies with the change of center frequency (the 25), when the pulse frequency is higher, DI5 port must be used .
set frequency) When the count value reaches the set count value(Ub.08), the multifunction digital DO
1: relative to maximum frequency(U0.10) will output "Set Count Value Arrival" ON signal, then the counter stops counting.
For the fixed swing system, the swing is fixed When the count value reaches the specified count value(Ub.09), the multifunction digital
DO will output "Specified Count Value Arrival" ON signal, then the counter continues to
Ub.01 Wobbulate range 0.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
count, and then stop till the set count value.
Sudden jump The figure is the schematic diagram of Ub.08 = 8 and Ub.09 = 4.
Ub.02 0.0% to 50.0% 0.0% ☆
frequency range
The parameter is used to determine the value of swing and the value of sudden jump
frequency. Count pulse
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
When the swing is set to Relative To Center frequency(Ub.00=0), Swing (AW) = DI5
frequency source (U0.07) × swing amplitude((Ub.01). When the swing is set to Relative To
Maximum Frequency(Ub.00=1), Swing (AW) = maximum frequency (U0.10) × swing Set count
amplitude((Ub.01). DO
If the sudden jump frequency range is selected for wobbulate operation, the frequency
percentage of sudden jump frequency range relative to swing, i.e.: Sudden jump frequency =
Speci fied counting rel ay
Swing(AW)×Sudden jump frequency range(Ub.02). When the swing is set to Relative To
Center frequency(Ub.00=0), the sudden jump frequency is the variable value. When the swing
is set to Relative To Middle Frequency(Ub.00=1), the sudden jump frequency is the fixed Schematic diagram of the set count value reference and the specified count value reference
value.
The frequency of wobbulate operation is restricted by the upper and lower frequencies.
163 164
5-2-14.Multi-stage command, simple PLC: UC.00-UC.51 maximum frequency; due to the PID reference is originally as a relative value, therefore the
PI9000's multi-stage command has the richer function than the usual multi-speed multi-stage command acts as the set source of PID and does not need dimension conversion.
command, in addition to the multi-speed function , it can also be used as process PID The multi-stage command needs to switch according to the different states of
multifunction digital DI, please refer to U4 group for specific instructions
reference source. Therefore, the dimensionl of multi-stage command is a relative value.
Stop after
Factory Change 0
Code Parameter name Setting range single running
setting limits
Simple PLC Hold final
UC.16 0 ☆
0-stage speed running mode value after 1
UC.00 -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
setting 0X single running
Circulating 2
1-stage speed UC.19
UC.01 -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
setting 1X
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
2-stage speed
UC.02 -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
setting 2X Running
direction
UC.21
UC.03 3-stage speed 0.0% ☆

-100.0% to 100.0%
setting 3X

UC.14
-100.0% to 100.0% UC.02
setting 4X
UC.25
5-stage speed
UC.05 -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆ UC.00
setting 5X
Time t

-100.0% to 100.0%
setting 6X

-100.0% to 100.0%
setting 7X
UC.01
8-stage speed
UC.08 -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
setting 8X
9-stage speed
UC.09 -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆ UC.18 UC.20 UC.23
setting 9X

-100.0% to 100.0%
setting 10X DO or RELAY ou tput

-100.0% to 100.0%
setting 11X Schematic diagram of simple PLC 250ms Pulse
12-stage speed
UC.12 -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
setting 12X
The above figure is the schematic diagram of Simple PLC as the frequency source. For
-100.0% to 100.0% Simple PLC as the frequency source, the positive or negative value of UC.00 to UC.15
setting 13X
determines the running direction, the negative value indicates that the inverter runs at the
14-stage speed opposite direction.
UC.14 -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
setting 14X As the frequency source, PLC operates in three modes, including:
0: stop after single running
15-stage speed
UC.15 -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆ After the inverter completes a single cycle, it will automatically shut down , the running
setting 15X command must be given before restart.
The multi-stage command can be used as frequency source, can also act as the set 1: hold final value after single running
source of process PID. The dimension of multi-stage command is the relative values and its After the inverter completes a single cycle, it will automatically maintain the frequency
range is from -100.0% to 100.0%, when it acts as the frequency source, it is the percentage of and direction of the last stage.
165 166
2: circulating T4
After the inverter completes a cycle, it will automatically start next cycle, and stop till ☆
the stop command is given.
4 stage
UC.27 ac/deceleration time 0 to 3 0
Units digit Power-
selection
down 00
memory 5 stage running time 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) ☆
UC.28 0.0s(h)
selection T5
Power-down ☆
without 0 5 stage
UC.29 ac/deceleration time 0 to 3 0
memory
Simple PLC power- selection
Power-down
UC.17 down memory 1 ☆ ☆
with memory 6 stage running time
selection UC.30 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h)
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Tens digit Stop T6
memory
6 stage ☆
selection UC.31 0 to 3 0
ac/deceleration time
Stop without
0 selection
memory
Stop with 7 stage running time ☆
1 UC.32 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h)
memory T7
PLC "Power-Down With Memory" means that the PLC operating stage and frequency 7 stage ☆
before power-down are memorized, and then it will continue to run from the position of the UC.33 ac/deceleration time 0 to 3 0
memorized stage in next power-on. If Power-Down Without Memory is selected, the PLC selection
process will restart from the starting position for each power-on
PLC "Stop With Memory" means that the PLC operating stage and frequency before 8 stage running time 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) ☆
UC.34 0.0s(h)
stop are recorded, and then it will continue to run from the position of the recorded stage in T8
next run. If Stop Without Memory is selected, the PLC process will restart from the starting
8 stage ☆
position for each start. UC.35 ac/deceleration time 0 to 3 0
0 stage running ☆
UC.18 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) selection
time T0 ☆
9 stage running time 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h)
0 stage ☆ UC.36 0.0s(h)
UC.19 0 to 3 0 T9
ac/deceleration time ☆
9 stage
1 stage running time 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) ☆ UC.37 ac/deceleration time 0 to 3 0
UC.20 0.0s(h)
T1 selection
1 stage ☆ ☆
UC.21 0 to 3 0 UC.38 10 stage running time
ac/deceleration time 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h)
T10
2 stage running time ☆ ☆
UC.22 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) 10 stage
T2 UC.39 ac/deceleration time 0 to 3 0
2 stage ☆ selection
UC.23 0 to 3 0 ☆
ac/deceleration time 11 stage running time
UC.40 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h)
3 stage running time 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) ☆ T11
UC.24 0.0s(h) ☆
T3 11 stage
3 stage ☆ UC.41 ac/deceleration time 0 to 3 0
UC.25 ac/deceleration time 0 to 3 0 selection
selection 12 stage running time 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) ☆
UC.42 0.0s(h)
UC.26 4 stage running time 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆ T12
167 168
12 stage ☆ 5-2-15.Communications parameters: Ud.00-Ud.06

UC.43 ac/deceleration time 0 to 3 0 Please refer to PI9000 Communication Protocol
selection
Factory Change
13 stage running time 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) ☆ Code Parameter name Setting range setting limits
UC.44 0.0s(h)
T13
Units digit MODBUS
13 stage ☆
UC.45 300BPS 0
ac/deceleration time 0 to 3 0
selection 600BPS 1
14 stage running time ☆ 1200BPS 2
UC.46 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h)
T14 Ud.00 Baud rate 2400BPS 3 5 ☆
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
14 stage ☆ 4800BPS 4
UC.47 ac/deceleration time 0 to 3 0 9600BPS 5
selection
19200BPS 6
15 stage running ☆
UC.48 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) 38400BPS 7
time T15
☆ No parity (8-N-
15 stage 0
UC.49 ac/deceleration time 0 to 3 0 2)
selection Even parity (8-
E-1) 1
S (seconds) Ud.01 Data format 0 ☆
Simple PLC run- 0 ☆ Odd parity (8-
UC.50 ☆ 2
time unit H (hours) 1 O-1)
Function code 8-N-1 3
UC.00 0
reference Ud.02 1-247, 0 for broadcast 1 ☆
This unit address
address
AI1 1
AI2 Ud.03 Response delay 0ms-20ms 2 ☆
2
Panel Communication 0.0 (invalid), 0.1s-60.0s
Ud.04 0.0 ☆
potentiometer 3 timeout time
reference
Multi-stage Units digit MODBUS
High-speed
UC.51 command 0 pulse 4 0 ☆ Non-standard
reference manner reference MODBUS 0
PID control protocol
reference 5 Standard
Keyboard set MODBUS 1
Data transfer format protocol
frequency Ud.05 30 ☆
selection
(U0.08) Tens digit Profibus
6
reference, PPO1 format 0
UP/DN can
be modified PPO2 format 1
This parameter determines the multi-stage command 0 reference channel. PPO3 format 2
The multi-stage command 0 not only can select UC.00, but also there are a variety of PPO5 format
other options so as to facilitate switching between the multi-stage command and the other 3
reference manner. 0.01A 0
Ud.06 Communication read 0 ☆
current resolution 0.1A 1
169 170
parameters selection
display
5-2-16.Function code management:UP.00-UP.04 properties Not display 0
Parameter Factory Change Display 1
Code Setting range
name setting limits
E group
UP.00 User password 0 to 65535 0 ☆ Tens digit display
When UP.00 is set to one any non-zero number, the password protection will take effect. selection
You enter the menu for the next time, you must enter the password correctly, otherwise can Not display 0
not view and modify the function parameters, please keep in mind the set user password.
Display 1
When UP.00 is set to 0, the set user password will be cleared, the password protection
function is invalid. Function code Modifiable 0
UP.04 0 ☆
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
No operation 0 modification Not modifiable 1
properties
Restore the
factory User can set whether function code parameter can be modified or not, so as to prevent
parameters, the risk that function parameters are altered unexpectedly.
1 If the function code is set to 0, all function code can be modified; while it is set to 1, all
not including
motor function code can only be viewed, can not be modified.
parameters
Clear history 2
Restore 5-2-17.Torque control parameters:E0.00-E0.08
default Factory Change
Parameter Code Parameter name Setting range
UP.01 parameter 0 ★ setting limits
initialization
values, 3 Speed/torque control Speed control 0
E0.00 0 ★
including mode selection Torque control 1
motor Used to select the inverter control mode: speed control or torque control.
parameters PI9000 multifunction digital terminal has two related functions on torque control: torque
Backup control banned (function 29), and speed control / torque control switching (function 46). The
current user 4 two terminals must use in conjunction with E0.00 so as to switch between speed control and
parameters torque control.
Restore user When the speed control / torque control switching terminal is invalid, the control mode
backup 501 is determined by E0.00, if the terminal is valid, the control manner is equivalent to the
parameters E0.00's value negated.
1: restore the factory setting, not including motor parameters In any case, when the torque control ban terminal is valid, the inverter is fixed at speed
After UP.01 is set to 1, most of the inverter function parameters are restored to the control mode.
factory default parameters, but motor parameters, frequency command decimal point Keyboard setting
(U0.22), fault recording information, cumulative running time (U7.09), cumulative power- 0
(E0.03)
on time(U7.13) and cumulative power consumption(U7.14) will not be restored. Analog AI1 setting 1
2: clear history
To clear the history of the inverter's fault recording information, cumulative running Analog AI2 setting 2
time (U7.09), cumulative power-on time(U7.13) and cumulative power consumption(U7.14) Panel potentiometer
Torque setting source 3
3: restore default parameter values including motor parameters setting
E0.01 selection under torque 0 ★
4: backup current user parameters High-speed pulse
Backup the parameters set by the current user. Backup all function parameters. It is easy control mode 4
setting
to restore the default settings when user incorrectly adjust parameters. Communications
501, Restore user backup parameters 5
reference
Restore previous backup user parameters.
MIN(AI1, AI2) 6
Units digit U group
UP.02 Function 11 ★ MAX(AI1, AI2) 7
display
171 172
Torque digital setting PWM waveform generation mode is only valid for VF control. The combination of 7-
E0.03 under torque control -200.0% to 200.0% 150% ☆ stage and 5-stage can achieve the purpose of optimizing PWM waveform. Below this value,
mode it is the 7-stage continuous modulation mode, on the contrary, it is the 5-stage interrupted
E0.04 Torque filter time 0.00s to 10.00s 0 ☆ modulation mode.
The inverter with the 7-stage continuous modulation mode has larger switching loss but
E0.01 is used to select the torque setting source, there are eight torque setting modes in
smaller current ripple; the inverter with the 5-stage continuous modulation mode has smaller
all. switching loss but larger current ripple
The torque setting adopts the relative value, the 100.0% corresponds to the rated torque Please refer to the function codes U3.11 for the instability on VF running, please refer to
of inverter. Setting range is from -200.0% to 200.0%, indicating that the maximum torque of
the function code U0.15 for the inverter loss and temperature rise;
inverter is 2 times of the rated torque of inverter.
When the torque setting adopts mode 1 to 7, the 100% of communications, analog input PWM modulation Asynchronous 0
E5.01 0 ☆
and pulse input corresponds to E0.03. manner Synchronou 1
Torque control
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
0.00Hz to maximum 50.00Hz Only valid for VF control. Synchronous modulation refers to that the carrier frequency
E0.05 forward maximum ☆ linearly change with the change of output frequency, in order to ensure the unchanged of
frequency(U0.10)
frequency their ratio(carrier to noise ratio), generally it is used when the output frequency is higher, is
Torque control conducive to ensure the output voltage quality.
E0.06 0.00Hz to maximum 50.00Hz ☆
reverse maximum Under the lower output frequency (100Hz) mode, generally the synchronize modulation
frequency(U0.10)
frequency is not required, because at the time the ratio of the carrier frequency to the output frequency
Used to set the maximum operating frequency of inverter forward or reverse running is relatively high, the asynchronous modulation has more obvious advantages.
under the torque control mode When the operating frequency is higher than 85Hz, the synchronous modulation takes
Under the torque control mode, if the load torque is less than the motor output torque, effect, the fixed mode is the asynchronous modulation below the frequency.
the motor speed will continue to rise, in order to prevent "Runaway" and other accidents of
No compensation 0
mechanical systems, it is necessary to limit the maximum speed of motor under the torque
Deadband Compensation mode
control mode. 1
E5.02 compensation mode 1 1 ☆
E0.07 Torque control 0.00s ☆ selection
0.00s to 36000s Compensation mode
acceleration time 2
Torque control 2
E0.08 0.00s to 36000s 0.00s ☆ Generally do not need to modify this parameter, only when the special requirements to
deceleration time
Under the torque control mode, the difference between the motor output torque and load the output voltage waveform quality is required or when the motor oscillation and other
torque determines the change rate in speed of the motor and load, therefore, the motor speed abnormal happen, you need to try to switch to select a different mode of compensation.
may rapidly change, resulting in the problems such as noise or excessive mechanical stress. The compensation mode 2 for high-power is recommended.
By setting the torque control ac/deceleration time, you can make a smooth change of motor Random PWM 0
speed. invalid
But the occasions that needs the rapid response of torque, the torque control E5.03 Random PWM depth PWM carrier 1 to 0 ☆
ac/deceleration time must be set to 0.00s. For example: when two hardwired motors drag frequency random 10
the same one load, in order to ensure that the load is evenly distributed, you must set one depth
inverter as the master unit that works under the speed control mode, the other inverter as the By setting Random PWM, the monotonous and shrill motor sound can become softer
auxiliary unit that works under the torque control mode, the actual output torque of the and which helps reduce external electromagnetic interference. When Random PWM Depth is
master unit is used as the torque command of the auxiliary, the torque of the auxiliary needs set to 0, Random PWM will be invalid. It will get different results by adjusting different
quickly follow the master unit, so the torque control ac/deceleration time of the auxiliary unit Random PWM Depths,
shall be set to 0.00s. Fast current limiting Disable 0
E5.04 1 ☆
manner Enable 1
5-2-18.Control optimization parameters: E5.00-E5.09 Enable Quick Current Limiting function, which can minimize the overcurrent fault of
Factory Change inverter , and ensure the uninterrupted operation of inverter. If the drive is in the state of
Code Parameter name Setting range fast current limiting for a long period of time , the inverter may be damaged by overheating
setting limits
and others, this case is not allowed, so the inverter will alarm fault with fault ID Err.40, it
Upper limiting indicates that the inverter exists overload and needs to be shut down.
E5.00 frequency for DPWM 0.00Hz to 15Hz 12.00Hz ☆ Current detection
switching E5.05 0 to 100 5 ☆
compensation
173 174
Chapter 5 Function parameter Chapter 6 EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility)
Used to set the inverter's current sensing compensation, if the set value is too large,
which may reduce the control performance. Generally do not need to be modified. Chapter 6 EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility)
Undervoltage point
E5.06 60.0% to 140.0% 100.0% ☆
setting
Used to set the voltage value of inverter undervoltage fault with fault ID Err.09 , the 6-1.Definition
different voltage levels of inverter 100.0% corresponds to the different voltage points are as Electromagnetic compatibility refers to the ability that the electric equipment
follows: runs in an electromagnetic interference environment and implements its function stably
Single-phase 220V or three-phase 220V: 200V three-phase 380V: 350V
without interferences on the electromagnetic environment.
Three-phase 480V: 450V three-phase 690V: 650V
No optimization 0 6-2.EMC standard
Vector optimization Optimization mode In accordance with the requirements of the Chinese national standard
1 ☆
Chapter 5
E5.07 without PG mode 1 1 GB/T12668.3, the inverter must comply with the requirements of electromagnetic
selection Optimization mode interference and anti- electromagnetic interference.
2 Our existing products adopt the latest international standards: IEC/EN61800-3:
2
Chapter 6
1: optimization mode 1 2004 (AdjPstable sPeed electrical Power drive systems Part 3: EMC reqPirements and
Used for the requirements of higher torque control linearity. sPecific test methods), which is equivalent to the Chinese national standards
2: optimization mode 2 GB/T12668.3. EC/EN61800-3 assesses the inverter in terms of electromagnetic
Used for the requirements of higher speed stability. interference and anti-electronic interference. Electromagnetic interference mainly tests
the radiation interference, conduction interference and harmonics interference on the
E5.08 Deadband time 150% ☆
100% to 200% inverter (necessary for civil inverter)
adjustment
Anti-electromagnetic interference mainly tests the conduction immunity, radiation
Overvoltage point immunity, surge immunity, EFTB(Electrical Fast Transient Burs) immunity, ESD
E5.09 200.0V to 2500.0V 810 ☆
setting immunity and power low frequency end immunity (the specific test items includes: 1.
Settings for the level of 1140V voltage. The adjustment of this value can improve the Immunity tests of input voltage sag, interrupt and change; 2.commutation notch
effective utilization of voltage, if the value is set to too small, which easily lead to the immunity; 3. harmonic input immunity ; 4. input frequency change; 5. input voltage
instability of system running. It's not recommended that user modifies it. unbalance; 6. input voltage fluctuation). The tests shall be conducted strictly in
accordance with the above requirements of IEC/EN61800-3, and our products are
installed and used according to the guideline of the Section 7.3 and can provide good
electromagnetic compatibility in general industry environment.
6-3.EMC directive
6-3-1.Harmonic effect:
The higher harmonics of power supply may damage the inverter. Thus, at some
places where the quality of power system is relatively poor, it is recommended to install
AC input reactor.
6-3-2.Electromagnetic interference and installation precautions:
There are two kinds of electromagnetic interferences, one is the interference from
electromagnetic noise in the surrounding environment to the inverter, and the other is
the interference from the inverter to the surrounding equipments.
Installation Precautions:
1) The earth wires of the Inverter and other electric products ca shall be well
grounded;
2) The power cables of the inverter power input and output and the cable of weak
current signal (e.g. control line) shall not be arranged in parallel but in vertical if
possible.
175 176
Chapter 6 EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) Chapter 6 EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility)
3) It is recommended that the output power cables of the inverter shall use shield current to the earth, and the other is leakage current between the cables.
cables or steel pipe shielded cables and that the shielding layer shall be grounded 1) Factors of affecting leakage current to the earth and its solutions:
reliably, the lead cables of the equipment suffering interferences shall use twisted-pair There are the distributed capacitance between the lead cables and the earth. The
shielded control cables, and the shielding layer shall be grounded reliably. larger the distributed capacitance, the larger the leakage current; the distributed
4) When the length of motor cable is longer than 100 meters, it needs to install capacitance can be reduced by effectively reducing the distance
output filter or reactor. between the inverter and the motor. The higher the carrier frequency, the larger the
leakage current. The leakage current can be reduced by reducing the carrier frequency.
6-3-3.Remedies for the interferences from the surrounding electromagnetic
However, the carrier frequency reduced may result in
equipments to the inverter:
the increase of motor noise.Please note that additional installation of reactor is also
Generally the electromagnetic interference on the inverter is generated by plenty of
an effective method to solve leakage current problem.
relays, contactors and electromagnetic brakes installed near the inverter. When the
The leakage current may increase with the increase of circuit current. Therefore,
inverter has error action due to the interferences, the following measures is
when the motor power is higher, the corresponding leakage current will be higher too.
recommended:
2) Factors of producing leakage current between the cables and its solutions:
Chapter 6
Chapter 6
1) Install surge suppressor on the devices generating interference;
There is the distributed capacitance between the output cables of the inverter. If the
2) Install filter at the input end of the inverter, please refer to Section 7.3.6 for the
current passing lines has higher harmonic, it may cause resonance and thus result in
specific operations.
leakage current. If the thermal relay is used, it may generate error action.
3) The lead cables of the control signal cable of the inverter and the detection line
The solution is to reduce the carrier frequency or install output reactor. It is
shall use the shielded cable and the shielding layer shall be grounded reliably.
recommended that the thermal relay shall not be installed in the front of the motor when
6-3-4.Remedies for the interferences from the inverter to the surrounding using the inverter, and that electronic over current protection function of the inverter
electromagnetic equipments: shall be used instead.
These noise interferences are classified into two types: one is the radiation
interference of the inverter, and the other is the conduction interference of the inverter. 6-3-6.Precautions on installing EMC input filter at the input end of power supply
These two types of interferences cause that the surrounding electric equipments suffer 1) Note: when using the inverter, please follow its rated values strictly. Since the
from the affect of electromagnetic or electrostatic induction. Further, the surrounding filter belongs to Classification I electric appliances, the metal enclosure of the filter and
equipment produces error action. For different interferences, please refer to the the metal ground of the installing cabinet shall be well earthed in a large area, and have
following remedies: good conduction continuity, otherwise there may be danger of electric shock and the
1) Generally the meters, receivers and sensors for measuring and testing have more
weak signals. If they are placed nearby the inverter or together with the inverter in the EMC effect may be greatly affected. Through the EMC test, it is found that the filter
same control cabinet, they easily suffer from interference and thus generate error actions. ground end and the PE end of the inverter must be connected to the same public earth
It is recommended to handle with the following methods: away from the interference end, otherwise the EMC effect may be greatly affected.
source as far as possible; do not arrange the signal cables with the power cables in 2) The filter shall be installed at a place close to the input end of the power supply
parallel and never bind them together; both the signal cables and power cables shall use as much as possible.
shielded cables and shall be well grounded; install ferrite magnetic ring (with
suppressing frequency of 30 to 1, 000MHz) at the output side of the inverter and wind it
2 to 3 turns; install EMC output filter in more severe conditions.
2) When the interfered equipment and the inverter use the same power supply, it
may cause conduction interference. If the above methods cannot remove the
interference, it shall install EMC filter between the inverter and the power supply (refer
to Section 7.3.6 for the selection operation);
3) The surrounding equipment shall be separately grounded, which can avoid the
interference caused by the leakage current of the inverter's grounding wire when
common grounding mode is adopted.
6-3-5.Remedies for leakage current

There are two forms of leakage current when using the inverter. One is leakage
177 178
Chapter 8 Installation and Spare Circuit Chapter 7 Troubleshooting
No. Fault ID Failure type Possible causes Solutions

earthing of inverter faults
output happens 5.perform identification for
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 5.the control mode is the motor parameters
vector and without 6.select Speed Tracking
identification of Start or restart after
PI9000 can provide effective protection when the equipment performance is played parameters
fully. The following faults may appear in the process of use, please refer to the stopping the motor.
following table to analyze the possible causes and then troubleshoot. 6.the motor that is 7.cancel the sudden load
rotating is started
In case of damage to the equipment and the reasons that can not solved, please 8.choose the inverter with
contact with your local dealers/agents, or directly contact with the manufacturers to seek unexpectedly.
large power level
solutions. 7.suddenly increase the
7.1 Fault alarm and countermeasures load in the process of
acceleration.
PI9000 can provide effective protection when the equipment performance is played
fully. In case of abnormal fault, the protection function will be invoked, the inverter 8.the type selection of
will stop output, and the faulty relay contact of the inverter will start, and the fault inverter is small
Chapter 7
Chapter 7
code will be displayed on the display panel of the inverter. Before consulting the 1.the short-circuit or
service department, user can perform self-check , analyze the fault cause and find out earthing of inverter
the solution according to the instructions of this chapter. If the fault is caused by the output happens 1.eliminate peripheral
reasons as described in the dotted frame, please consult the agents of inverter or
2.the control mode is faults
directly contact with our company.
vector and without 2.perform identification for
No. Fault ID Failure type Possible causes Solutions identification of the motor parameters
parameters 3.increase the deceleration
1.the short circuit of
inverter output happens 3 Err.03 Deceleration 3.the deceleration time is time
overcurrent
too short 4.set the voltage to the
2.the wiring for the 1.eliminate peripheral
motor and the inverter is faults 4.the voltage is low normal range
too long 2.additionally install the 5.suddenly increase the 5.cancel the sudden load
3.module overheating reactor or the output filter load in the process of 6.install braking unit and
deceleration. brake resistor
1 Err.01 Inverter unit 4.the internal wiring of 3.check the air duct is
protection inverter is loose blocked or not and the fan 6.didn't install braking
is working normally or not, unit and braking resistor
5.the main control panel
is abnormal and eliminate problems 1.the short-circuit or
4.correctly plug all cables earthing of inverter
6.the drive panel is 1.eliminate peripheral
output happens
abnormal. 5.seek for technical support faults
2.the control mode is
7.the inverter module is 2.perform identification for
vector and without
abnormal the motor parameters
identification of
1.the acceleration time is 1.increase acceleration time 4 Err.04 Constant speed 3.set the voltage to the
overcurrent parameters
too short 2.adjust manual torque normal range
3.the voltage is low
2.manual torque boost or boost or V/F curve 4.cancel the sudden load
2 Err.02 Acceleration 4, whether suddenly
overcurrent V/F curve is not suitable 3.set the voltage to the 5.choose the inverter with
increase the load when
3.the voltage is low normal range running large power level
4.the short-circuit or 4.eliminate peripheral 5.the type selection of
179 180
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Chapter 7 Troubleshooting
No. Fault ID Failure type Possible causes Solutions No. Fault ID Failure type Possible causes Solutions
inverter is small 6.the control panel is
abnormal
1.didn't install braking 1.the type selection of 1.choose the inverter with
unit and braking resistor 1.install braking unit and inverter is small large power level
2.the input voltage is brake resistor 10 Err.10 Inverter overload 2.whether the load is too 2.reduce the load and check
high 2.set the voltage to the large or the motor stall the motor and its
5 Err.05 Acceleration 3.there is external force normal range occurs mechanical conditions
overvoltage
to drag the motor to run 3.cancel the external force 1.the type selection of
when accelerating. or install braking resistor. inverter is small 1.choose the inverter with
4.the acceleration time is 4.increase acceleration time 2.whether the setting large power level
too short motor protection 2.correctly set this
1.the input voltage is 11 Err.11 Motor Overload parameters (U9.01) is parameter.
1.set the voltage to the appropriate or not
high 3.reduce the load and check
normal range
Chapter 7
Chapter 7
2.there is external force 3.whether the load is too the motor and its
2.cancel the external force large or the motor stall mechanical conditions
to drag the motor to run
Deceleration or install braking resistor. occurs
6 Err.06 when decelerating.
overvoltage 3.increase the deceleration
3.the deceleration time is 1.the drive panel is 1.replace the drive, the
time abnormal. power board or contactor
too short
4.install braking unit and 2.the lightning protection 2.seek for technical support
4.didn't install braking
brake resistor plate is abnormal
unit and braking resistor 12 Err.12 Input phase loss 3.check and eliminate the
1.there is external force 3.the main control panel existing problems in the
1.cancel the external force is abnormal peripheral line
to drag the motor to run
Constant speed or install braking resistor.
7 Err.07 when running 4.the three-phase input
overvoltage 2.set the voltage to the
2.the input voltage is power is not normal
normal range
high 1.the lead wires from the
The range of input Adjust the voltage to the inverter to the motor is
8 Err.08 Control power fault voltage is not within the range of the requirements not normal 1.eliminate peripheral
specification of specification 2.the inverter's three faults
1.the momentary power phase output is 2.check the motor's three-
13 Err.13 Output phase loss
cut unbalanced when the phase winding is normal or
2.the inverter's input motor is running not and eliminate faults
voltage is not within the 3.the drive panel is 3.seek for technical support
specification 1.reset fault abnormal.
3.the bus voltage is not 2.adjust the voltage to the 4.the module is abnormal
9 Err.09 Undervoltage fault
normal normal range 1.the air duct is blocked 1.clean up the air duct
4.the rectifier bridge and 3.seek for technical support 2.the fan is damaged 2.replace the fan
buffer resistance are Module
14 Err.14 3.the ambient 3.decrease the ambient
abnormal overheating temperature is too high temperature
5.the drive panel is
4.the module thermistor 4.replace the thermistor
abnormal.
is damaged 5.replace the inverter
181 182
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Chapter 7 Troubleshooting
No. Fault ID Failure type Possible causes Solutions No. Fault ID Failure type Possible causes Solutions
5.the inverter module is module fault 2.overcurrent fault
damaged 2.eliminate overcurrent
Input external fault signal fault
External equipment
15 Err.15 through the multi-function Reset run Short-circuit to
fault 23 Err.23 Motor short to ground Replace the cable or motor
terminal DI ground fault
1.the communication Cumulative Clear history information
Cumulative running time
cable is not normal 26 Err.26 running time by using initialization
1.check the communication arrival fault
2.the settings for arrival fault function parameters
cable
communication Input custom fault 1
2.correctly set the 27 Err.27 Custom fault 1 signal through the multi- Reset run
expansion card U0.28 are
communications expansion function terminal DI
Communication incorrect
16 Err.16 card type Input custom fault 2
fault 3.the settings for
3.correctly set the 28 Err.28 Custom fault 2 signal through the multi- Reset run
communication
communication parameters function terminal DI
parameters Ud group are
Chapter 7
Chapter 7
incorrect 4.check the wiring of host Clear history information
Total power-on Total power-on time
computer 29 Err.29 by using initialization
4.the host computer is not time arrival fault reaches the set value
function parameters
working properly
Confirm whether the load
1.check and eliminate the is removed or not or the
1.input phase loss existing problems in the The inverter running settings for
17 Err.17 Contactor fault peripheral line 30 Err.30 Load drop fault
2.the drive plate and the current is less than U9.64 parameter(U9.64, U9.65)
contact are not normal 2.replace the drive, the accord with the actual
power board or contactor operating conditions
1.check Hall device Check PID feedback signal
1.replace the drive panel PID feedback loss PID feedback is less than
18 Err.18 Current detection 2.the drive panel is 31 Err.31 or set UA.26 to an
2.replace hall device when running fault the set value of UA.26
fault abnormal. appropriate value
1.the motor parameters 1.whether the load is too 1.reduce the load and check
1.correctly set motor Cycle-by-cycle large or the motor stall the motor and its
was not set according to
parameter according to the 40 Err.40 current limiting occurs mechanical conditions
Motor parameter the nameplate
19 Err.19 nameplate fault 2.the type selection of 2.choose the inverter with
auto tunning fault 2.the identification
2.check the lead wire from inverter is small large power level
process of parameter is
the inverter to the motor Change current motor
timeout
41 Err.41 Switch motor when through the terminal Switch motor after the
1.the encoder is damaged 1.replace the encoder when the inverter is inverter stops
running fault
2.PG card is abnormal 2.replace the PG card running
20 Err.20 3.the encoder model does 3.correctly set the encoder 1.the setting for Too
Disk code fault 1.reasonably set the
not match model according to the Large Speed Deviation
actual conditions detection parameters
4.the encoder connection parameters(U9.69,
4.eliminate the line fault Too large speed U9.70) is unreasonable. 2.correctly set encoder
has error 42 Err.42
deviation fault parameters
EEPROM read and EEPROM chip is Replace the main control 2.the setting for encoder
21 Err.21 3.perform identification for
write fault damaged panel parameters is incorrect
the motor parameters
22 Err.22 Inverter hardware 1.overvoltage 1.eliminate overvoltage 3.the parameter was not
183 184
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Chapter 8 Installation and Spare Circuit
No. Fault ID Failure type Possible causes Solutions

identified
1.the parameter was not Chapter 8 Installation and spare circuit
identified 1.perform identification for
2.the setting for encoder the motor parameters
8-1.Operating environment
43 Err.43 Motor overspeed parameters is incorrect 2.correctly set encoder
fault (1) Ambient temperature -10 ℃ to 50 ℃.
3.the setting for motor parameters
(2) Prevent electromagnetic interference, and away from interference sources.
overspeed detection 3.reasonably set the
(3) Prevent the ingress of droplets, vapor, dust, dirt, lint and metal fine powder.
parameter(U9.67, U9.68) detection parameters
is unreasonable. (4) Prevent the ingress of oil, salt and corrosive gases.
(5) Avoid vibration.
1.detect the wiring of
(6) Avoid high temperature and humidity or exposure to rain, humidity shall be less
1.the wiring of temperature sensor wiring
and eliminate fault. than 90% RH (non-condensing).
Motor temperature sensor is
45 Err.45 loose (7) Never use in the dangerous environment of flammable, combustible, explosive gas,
overtemperature 2.decrease carrier
liquid or solid.
Chapter 7
Chapter 8
fault 2.the motor temperature frequency or take other
is too high cooling measures to cool 8-2.Installation direction and space
motor The inverter shall be installed in the room where it is well ventilated, the wall-
the deviation between the reconfirm the correct motor mounted installation shall be adopted, and the inverter must keep enough space around
adjacent items or baffle (wall). As shown below figure:
Initial position motor parameters and the parameters, focus on
51 Err.51
error actual parameters is too whether the rated current is
large set to too small. 150mm
Air out or more Air out Air
50mm 50mm
or more or more
WARNING
Read the operation manual befo re adjus t or ins pect.
High voltage ins ide.M aintained by the well -trained
pers onnel.
Confirm the i nput and outpu t dc contro l cables are
well connected.
Adjus t or ins pect the inner ci rcuits after powe r down
and dis charge.
150mm
Air in or more Air in
8-3.Wiring diagram
The wiring of inverter is divided into two parts of main circuit and control circuit.
User must correctly connect in accordance with the wiring circuit as shown in the
following figure.
185 186
Chapter 8 Installation and Spare Circuit Chapter 8 Installation and Spare Circuit
8-3-1.Wiring diagram(< 11kW) 8-3-2.Wiring diagram(11kW to 15kW)
Main Circuit
Main Circuit
Control Circuit
Control Circuit
Chapter 8
Chapter 8
187 188
8-3-3.Wiring diagram(18.5kW to 355kW) 8-4.Main circuit terminal (G type)

8-4-1.PI9000 main circuit terminal
1. Main circuit terminal(<7.5KW, 380V)
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 P P+ RB U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 E

Ground terminals
Input end of main power DC reactor Braking resistor Output end of main power
Main Circuit
Note: the above power classification is relative to G-type machine.
Control Circuit 2. Main circuit terminal(11kW to 15kW, 380V)
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 P P+ RB U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 E
Chapter 8
Chapter 8
Ground terminals
Input end of main power DC reactor Braking resistor Output end of main power
3. Main circuit terminal(18.5kW to 355kW, 380V)(Left In, Right Out)
P P+ P- R S T U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 E

Ground terminals
Input end of main power Output end of main power

P/P+: DC reactor
P+/P-: Braking unit

4. Main circuit terminal(45kW to 220kW, 380V)(Up In, Down Out)
Input en d o f
main power
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
P P+ P- U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 /E

Grou nd terminals
P/P+ : DC reacto r Output en d o f main po wer

P+/P- : Braking unit
189 190
Note: P/P+ standard configuration is for the shorted state; if external DC reactor is terminal 2 depends on the selected J4 jumper on control
connected, firstly disconnect and then reconnect. panel.
2.Input impedance: 22kΩ with voltage input,
500Ω with current input.
8-4-2.Function description of main circuit terminal
DI1 Digital input 1 1.Opto-coupler isolation, compatible with
Terminals Name Description DI2 Digital input 2 bipolar input
R/L1 DI3 Digital input 3 2.Input impedance: 2.4kΩ
Connect to three-phase power 3.Voltage range with level input: 9V to 30V
Inverter input DI4 Digital input 4
S/L2 supply, single-phase connects to R, 4. Below 11KW: (DI1 to DI6)drive manner is
terminals DI5 Digital input 5
T controlled by J5, when external power supply
T/L3 DI6 Digital input 6
DI7 Digital input 7 is used to drive, please unplug J5 jumpers ,
/E Ground terminals Connect to ground Digital
input 5. Above 11KW: (DI1 to DI4)drive manner is
Braking resistor controlled by J6, (DI5 to DI8)drive
P+, RB Connect to braking resistor
terminals DI8 Digital input 8 manner is controlled by J5, when external
U/T1 power supply is used to drive, please
unplug J5 jumpers ,
Chapter 8
Chapter 8
V/T2 Output terminals Connect to three-phase motor High-speed DI5 can also be used as high-speed pulse
W/T3 DI5 pulse input input channels.
terminals Maximum input frequency: 100kHz
DC bus output
P+, P- Connect to braking unit The selected J2 jumper on control panel
terminals
DA1- Analog output determines voltage or current output. Output
DC reactor Connect to DC reactor(remove the GND 1 voltage range: 0V to 10V , output current
P, P+
terminals shorting block) Analog range: 0mA to 20mA
output The selected J1 jumper on control panel
8-5.Control circuit terminals
DA2- Analog output determines voltage or current output. Output
8-5-1. Description of control circuit terminals GND 2 voltage range: 0V to 10V , output current
Categ range: 0mA to 20mA
Symbol Name Function
ory Digital output Opto-coupler isolation, bipolar open collector
Output +10V power supply, maximum output SPA-COM
External＋ current: 10mA 1 output
+10V- Digital output Output voltage range: 0V to 24V , output
10V power Generally it is used as power supply of SPB-COM
GND Digital 2 current range: 0mA to 50mA
supply external potentiometer, potentiometer
resistance range: 1kΩ to 5kΩ output Subject to function code(U5.00)"SPB
Output +24V power supply, generally it is High-speed terminal output mode selection"
Power SPB-COM
+24V- External+24V used as power supply of digital input and pulse output As a high-speed pulse output, the highest
supply
COM power supply output terminals and external sensor.
Maximum output current: 200mA frequency up to 100kHz;
When external signal is used to drive, please T/A1- Normally
External T/C1 open terminals
unplug J5 jumpers , PLC must be connected
PLC power input Relay Contactor drive capacity: AC250V, 3A, COSø
to external power supply, and to +24V Normally
terminal output T/B1- = 0.4.
(default). closed
1.Input range:(DC 0V to 10V/0 to 20mA), T/C1
terminals
depends on the selected J3 jumper on control
Analog input 485 card
Analog AI1-GND terminal 1 panel. Auxiliar J12 26-pin terminal
input 2.Input impedance: 22kΩ with voltage input, interface
y
500Ω with current input. interface J13 PG card
12-pin terminal
AI2-GND Analog input 1.Input range:(DC 0V to 10V/0 20mA), interface
191 192
8-5-2.Arrangement of control circuit terminals ※ In order to minimize the effects of electromagnetic interference, it is recommended
1. 9KLCB board control circuit terminals that a surge absorption device shall be installed additionally when electromagnetic
contactor and relay is closer from the inverter.
※ External control lines of inverter shall adopt isolation device or shielded wire.
※ In addition to shielding, the wiring of input command signal should also be aligned
separately, it is best to stay away from the main circuit wiring.
※ If the carrier frequency is less than 3KHz, the maximum distance between the
inverter and the motor should be within 50 meters; if the carrier frequency is
greater than 4KHz, the distance should be reduced appropriately, it is best to lay
the wiring inside metal tube.
※ When the inverter is additionally equipped with peripherals (filter, reactor, etc.),
firstly measure its insulation resistance to ground by using 1000 volt megger, so as
2. 9KSCB board control circuit terminals
to ensure the measured value is no less than 4 megohms.
※ When the inverter need to be started frequently, do not directly turn power off, only
the control terminal or keyboard or RS485 operation command can be used to
control the start/stop operation, in order to avoid damage to the rectifier bridge.
※
Chapter 8
Chapter 8
Do not connect the AC input power to the inverter output terminals(U, V, W).
※ To prevent the occurrence of an accident, the ground terminal( )must be earthed
firmly(grounding impedance should be less than 100 ohms), otherwise the leakage
current will occur.
※ The specifications on wires used by the main circuit wiring shall comply with the
relevant provisions of the National Electrical Code.
※ The motor's capacity should be equal to or less than the inverter's capacity.
8-6.Wiring Precautions:
Danger 8-7.Spare Circuit
Make sure that the power switch is in the OFF state before wiring operation, or electrical shock may When the inverter occurs the fault or trip, which will cause a larger loss of
occur! downtime or other unexpected faults. In order to avoid this case from happening, please
Wiring must be performed by a professional trained personnel, or this may cause damage to the
additionally install spare circuit to ensure safety.
equipment and personal injury!
Must be grounded firmly, otherwise there is a danger of electric shock or fire hazard ! Note: the characteristics of spare circuit must be confirmed and tested beforehand,
and its power-frequency shall be in accordance with the phase sequence of the inverter.
Note
Make sure that the input power is consistent with the rated value of inverter, otherwise which may
cause damage to the inverter! Three-ph ase p ower
Make sure that the motor matches the inverter, otherwise which may cause damage to the motor or
activate the inverter protection! Inverter
Do not connect power supply to U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 terminals, otherwise which may cause damage to
the inverter!
Do not directly connect braking resistor to DC bus (P), (P +) terminals, otherwise which may cause a
fire! Interlocked
AC contactor
※ The U, V, W output end of inverter can not install phase advancing capacitor or
RC absorbing device. The inverter input power must be cut off when replacing the
motor
※ Do not let metal chips or wire ends into inside the inverter when wiring, otherwise
which may cause malfunction to the inverter.
※ Disconnect motor or switch power-frequency power supply only when the inverter
stops output
193 194
Chapter 9 Maintenance and Repair Chapter 9 Maintenance and Repair
The different instruments may come to different measurement results when

Chapter 9 Maintenance and Repair measuring. It is recommended that the pointer voltmeter shall be used for measuring
input voltage, the rectifier voltmeter for output voltage, the clamp-on ammeter for input
current and output current, and the electric wattmeter for power.
9-1.Inspection and Maintenance
During normal use of the inverter, in addition to routine inspections, the regular 9-2.Parts for regular replacement
inspections are required (e.g. the overhaul or the specified interval, and the interval shall To ensure the reliable operation of inverter, in addition to regular care and
not exceed 6 months), please refer to the following table to implement the preventive maintenance, some internal mechanical wear parts(including cooling fan, filtering
measures. capacitor of main circuit for energy storage and exchange, and printed circuit board)
shall be regularly replaced. Use and replacement for such parts shall follow the
Check Date Check Check Check to be
Method Criterion provisions of below table, also depend on the specific application environment, load and
Routine Regular Points Items done
current status of inverter.
Whether display
Visually As per
√ Display LED display is abnormal or Name of Parts Standard life time
check use status
not Cooling fan 1 to 3 years
Whether Visually
Cooling abnormal noise and Filter capacitor 4 to 5 years
√ √ Fan No abnormal
system or vibration audibly Printed circuit board(PCB) 5 to 8 years
exists or not check
Temperature, Visually 9-3.Storage
Surrounding humidity, check with As per The following actions must be taken if the inverter is not put into use
√ Body
conditions dust, harmful smelling and Section 2-1
immediately(temporary or long-term storage) after purchasing:
gas. feeling
※ It should be store at a well-ventilated site without damp, dust or metal dust, and
Chapter 9
Chapter 9
Whether
Test R, S, the ambient temperature complies with the range stipulated by standard
input/output As per
Input/output T and U,
√ Voltage voltage standard specification
terminals V, W
is abnormal or
terminals
specifications ※ If the time that the inverter is set aside exceeds one year, a charge test should be
not made so as to resume the performance of the filtering capacitor of main circuit.
Whether these
phenomenon of When charging, the voltage regulator can be used to slowly rise input voltage of
loose fastenings, Visually the inverter until the rated input voltage, the charging time is 1 to 2 hours or more.
overheat, check,
Overall
discharging, tighten and
No abnormal The above test shall be performed at least once a year.
much dust, or clean ※ Voltage withstand test can not be arbitrarily implemented, it will reduce the life of
blocked air duct inverter. Insulation test can be made with the 500-volt megger before using, the
exist or not
insulation resistance shall not be less than 4MΩ.
√ Main circuit Whether
Electrolytic Visually
appearance is No abnormal 9-4.Measuring and readings
capacitance check
abnormal or not
※ If a general instrument is used to measure current, imbalance will exists for the
Wires and
Whether they are Visually current at the input terminal. generally, the deviation is not more than 10%, that is
conducting No abnormal
loose or not check normal. If the deviation exceeds 30%, please inform the original manufacturer to
bar
If screws or bolts replace rectifier bridge, or check if the deviation of three-phase input voltage is
Terminals Tighten No abnormal
are loose or not above 5V or not.
"√" means routine or regular check to be needed ※ If a general multi-meter is used to measure three-phase output voltage, the reading
Do not disassemble or shake the device gratuitously during check, and never is not accurate due to the interference of carrier frequency and it is only for
unplug the connectors, otherwise the system will not run or will enter into fault state and reference.
lead to component failure or even damage to the main switching device such as IGBT
module.
195 196
Chapter 10 Options Chapter 10 Options
10-1.Options
Chapter 10 Options
If the extended function (such as RS485 card, PG card, etc.)for other functional
modules is needed, please specify the functional module card you want when ordering.
User can additionally install peripheral devices based on the different application
conditions and requirements for this series of product, and its wiring diagram is as 10-2.Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or earth leakage circuit
follows: breaker (ELCB)
Three-phase AC power MCCB or ELCB as the power switch of the inverter also plays a protective role to
Please use the power supply meeting
the specifications of the inverter. the power supply. Note: do not use MCCB or ELCB to control start/stop of the
Molded case circuit breaker inverter.
(MCCB) or earth leakage circuit
breaker (ELCB)
When the power is on, the inverter will
10-3.AC reactor
receive a great impact on current, the
proper selection of breaker is very
important.
AC reactor can inhibit high harmonics of the inverter input current, significantly
improving power factor of the inverter. It is recommended that AC reactor should be
used in the following cases.
AC contactor ※ The ratio of the capability of power supply used for the inverter to the inverter
own capability is more than 10:1.
※ The thyristor load or the device of power-factor compensation with ON/OFF is
connected with the same power supply.
Input AC reactor
※ The degree of unbalance for three-phase power supply voltage is larger (≥ 3%).
Braking resistor
(optional)
Dimensions for common specifications of AC input reactor are as follows:
Input side
Noise filter Braking unit
Chapter 10
Chapter 10
Powtran inverter
DCreactor
Connect
T o pr eve nt e lec tric to ground
sho ck, th e mo tor and
th e i nve rter mus t b e
well gr ound ed
Output side
Noise filter
AC output reactor
Motor
Connect to
ground
197 198
Dimensions 55 230 175 160 10 160 120 23.0
Inverter specifications Size(mm) Gross weight(kg)
75 285 220 230 14 180 130 30.0
Voltage Capability(kw) A B C D E F
110 285 250 230 14 210 140 33.0
0.75 155 125 95 7 89 60 3.0
160 360 260 230 14 210 140 40.0
1.5 155 125 95 7 89 60 3.0
200 360 270 230 14 210 140 45.0
2.2 155 125 95 7 89 60 3.0
250 400 330 240 14 240 140 55.0
4 155 125 95 7 89 60 3.5
315 400 350 285 14 270 160 90.0
5.5 155 125 100 7 89 60 3.5
10-4.Noise filter
7.5 155 125 112 7 89 70 4.0
This filter is used to inhibit the conduction of electromagnetic interference noise
11 155 125 112 7 89 70 6.0 generated from the inverter, and also inhibit the interference of external radio and
200V instantaneous surge to this unit.
15 180 140 112 8 90 80 8.0
230V Before using, firstly confirm that the power supply is three-phase three-wire or
18.5 180 140 112 8 90 90 8.0
three-phase four-wire; if it's a single-phase, the grounding wire should be chunky, the
22 180 140 112 8 90 90 8.0 filter should be close to the inverter as much as possible.
30 230 175 122 10 160 90 12.0 The filter shall be used in the following occasions of residential area, commercial
area, scientific & research units, and the occasion that requires higher protection to
37 230 175 132 10 160 100 15.0
radio interference, or the conditions that meets CE, PL, CSA standards and is inadequate
45 230 175 150 10 160 110 23.0 on the peripheral anti-interference equipments.
55 230 175 160 10 160 120 23.0 To purchase it, please contact this company.
Chapter 10
Chapter 10
75 285 220 230 14 180 130 30.0 10-5.Contactor
It's used to cut off power supply to prevent the failure to be expanded when the
0.75 155 125 95 7 89 60 3.0
protection function of the system is activated. The contactor can not be used to control
1.5 155 125 95 7 89 60 3.0 the stop/start of the motor.
2.2 155 125 95 7 89 60 3.0 10-6.Braking unit and braking resistor
4 155 125 95 7 89 60 3.5 If user chooses the model with braking function, that is, the inverter contains a
built-in braking unit and the maximum braking torque is 50%. Users can separately
5.5 155 125 100 7 89 60 3.5
purchase the matched braking resistor with the reference of below table.
7.5 155 125 112 7 89 70 4.0
380V Inverter Resistance of Power of braking
11 155 125 112 7 89 70 6.0 Power of inverter(kW)
specifications braking resistor(Ω) resistor(kW)
460V
15 180 140 112 8 90 80 8.0 0.75 200 120
18.5 180 140 112 8 90 90 8.0 1.5 100 300
22 180 140 112 8 90 90 8.0 2.2 70 300
220V
30 230 175 122 10 160 90 12.0 4 40 500
37 230 175 132 10 160 100 15.0 5.5 30 500
45 230 175 150 10 160 110 23.0 7.5 20 780
199 200
11 13.6 2000 5 NFI-

380 18.5 to 22 50 3.5 261/100/90 243/70
050
15 10 3000
6 NFI-
380 30 65 4.5 240/190/90 180/175
18 8 4000 065
22 6.8 4500 7 NFI-

380 37 80 6.6 390/200/90 260/185
080
0.75 750 120 8 NFI-
380 45 100 7 390/200/90 260/185
1.5 400 300 100
9 NFI-
2.2 250 300 150
380 55 to 75 150 7.7 400/200/90 260/185
4 150 500 10 NFI-

380V 200
380 90 200 5.2 340/190/90 180/175
5.5 100 500
11 NFI-
7.5 75 780 380 110 to 132 250 7.7 380/210/90 180/195
250
11 50 1000 12 NFI-
300 380 160 300 7.7 380/210/90 180/195
15 40 1500
13 NFI-
380 200 400 9 470/260/128 165/245
If you needs greater torque of built-in braking unit, Powtran braking unit is your 400
best choice, please see the manual of Powtran braking unit manual for details. 10-9-2.Intput filter(690V)
Other high-power models do not contain built-in braking unit. If the high-power
No. Dimensions Installation
machine needs braking unit, Powtran braking unit is the best choice. Net
Model Voltage(V) Power(KW) Current(A) L/W/H(mm) size
weight(kg)
10-7.Output EMI filter a/b/d(mm)
Chapter 10
Chapter 10
It is used to inhibit noise interference and leakage current generated in the inverter 1 NFI-
690 0.75 to 1.5 5 0.7 130/105/44 51/95
output side. 005
10-8.AC output reactor 2 NFI-

690 2.2 to 4 10 1.3 202/86/58 184/60
010
When the connection wire from the inverter to the motor is longer (over 20 meters),
it is used to inhibit overcurrent caused due to the distributed capacitance. Meanwhile, it 3 NFI-
690 5.5 to 7.5 20 2.5 261/100/90 243/70
020
can also inhibit the radio interference of the inverter.
4 NFI-
10-9.Input filter 690 11 to 15 36 2.7 261/100/90 243/70
036
10-9-1.Intput filter(380V)
5 NFI-
No. Dimensions Installation 690 18.5 to 22 50 3.5 261/100/90 243/70
050
Net
weight(kg) 6 NFI-
a/b/d(mm) 065
690 30 65 4.5 240/190/90 180/175
1 NFI- 7 NFI-
380 0.75 to 1.5 5 0.7 130/105/44 51/95
005 690 37 80 6.6 390/200/90 260/185
080
2 NFI-
380 2.2 to 4 10 1.3 202/86/58 184/60 8 NFI-
010 690 45 100 7 390/200/90 260/185
100
3 NFI-
380 5.5 to 7.5 20 2.5 261/100/90 243/70 9 NFI-
020 690 55 to 75 150 7.7 400/200/90 260/185
150
4 NFI-
380 11 to 15 36 2.7 261/100/90 243/70 10 NFI-
036 690 90 200 5.2 340/190/90 180/175
200
201 202
11 NFI- 10-10-2.Output filter(690v)

690 110 to 132 250 7.7 380/210/90 180/195
250 No. Dimensions Installation
Net
12 NFI- Model Voltage(V) Power(KW) Current(A) L/W/H(mm) size
690 160 300 7.7 380/210/90 180/195 weight(kg)
300 a/b/d(mm)
13 NFI- 1 NF0-
690 200 400 9 470/260/128 165/245 690 0.75 to 1.5 5 0.75 135/105/44 51/95
400 005
14 NFI- 2 NF0-
690 215 to 250 600 14.2 470/245/128 165/245 690 2.2 to 4 10 1.25 202/86/58 184/60
600 010
3 NF0-
10-10.Output filter 020
690 5.5 to 7.5 20 1.47 202/86/58 184/60
10-10-1.Output filter(380v)
4 NF0-
No. Dimensions Installation 690 11 to 15 36 2.35 215/100/70 200/70
Net 036
weight(kg) 5 NF0-
a/b/d(mm) 690 18.5 to 22 50 2.37 215/100/70 200/70
050
1 NF0-
380 0.75 to 1.5 5 0.75 135/105/44 51/95 6 NF0-
005 690 30 65 2.73 261/100/90 243/70
065
2 NF0-
380 2.2 to 4 10 1.25 202/86/58 184/60 7 NF0-
010 690 37 80 3.19 261/100/90 243/70
080
3 NF0-
380 5.5 to 7.5 20 1.47 202/86/58 184/60 8 NF0-
020 690 45 100 3.34 261/100/90 243/70
100
4 NF0-
380 11 to 15 36 2.35 215/100/70 200/70 9 NF0-
036 690 55 to 75 150 5.04 320/190/90 180/175
150
Chapter 10
Chapter 10
5 NF0-
380 18.5 to 22 50 2.37 215/100/70 200/70 10 NF0-
050 690 90 200 4.58 320/190/90 240/175
200
6 NF0-
380 30 65 2.73 261/100/90 243/70 11 NF0-
065 690 110 to 132 250 6.9 380/210/90 180/195
250
7 NF0-
380 37 80 3.19 261/100/90 243/70 12 NF0-
080 690 160 300 7.2 380/210/90 180/195
300
8 NF0-
380 45 100 3.34 261/100/90 243/70 13 NF0-
100 690 200 400 13.2
400
9 NF0-
380 55 to 75 150 5.04 320/190/90 180/175 14 NF0-
150 690 215 to 250 600 13.4 320/260/128 165/245
600
10 NF0-
380 90 200 4.58 320/190/90 240/175
200 10-11.Input reactor
11 NF0-
250
380 110 to 132 250 6.9 380/210/90 180/195 10-11-1.Input reactor(380V)
No. Voltage Inductance(mH) Installation
12 NF0- Rated Net
380 160 300 7.2 380/210/90 180/195 Model Voltage(V) Power(KW) drop(V) size
300 Current(A) weight(kg)
a/b/d(mm)
13 NF0- 1 ACL- 2.00%
380 200 400 13.2
400 0005-
380 1.5 5 2.48 2.8 91/65
EISC-
14 NF0- E3M8B
380 215 to 250 600 13.4 320/260/128 165/245
600
203 204
2 ACL- 2.00% 14 ACL- 2.00%

0007- 0200-
380 2.2 7 2.54 2 91/65 380 75 200 19.2 0.07 182/96
EISC- ELSH-
E2M5B E80UB
3 ACL- 2.00% 15 ACL- 2.00%
0010- 0250-
380 3.7 10 2.67 1.4 91/65 380 110 250 22.1 0.056 182/96
EISC- ELSH-
E1M5B E65UB
4 ACL- 2.00% 16 ACL- 2.00%

0015- 0290-
380 5.5 15 3.45 0.93 95/61 380 132 290 28.3 0.048 214/100
EISH- ELSH-
E1M0B E50UB
5 ACL- 2.00% 17 ACL- 2.00%

0020- 0330-
380 7.5 20 3.25 0.7 95/61 380 160 330 28.3 0.042 214/100
EISH- ELSH-
EM75B E50UB
6 ACL- 2.00% 18 ACL- 2.00%
0030- 0390-
380 11 30 0.47 95/61 380 185 390 31.8 0.036 243/112
EISH- ELSH-
EM60B E44UB
7 ACL- 2.00% 19 ACL- 2.00%
0040- 0490-
380 15 40 0.35 95/61 380 220 490 43.6 0.028 243/122
EISH- ELSH-
EM42B E35UB
8 ACL- 2.00% 20 ACL- 2.00%

0050- 0530-
Chapter 10
Chapter 10
380 18.5 50 0.28 95/61 380 240 530 0.026
EISH- ELSH-
EM35B E35UB
9 ACL- 2.00% 21 ACL- 2.00%
0060- 0600-
380 22 60 0.24 95/61 380 280 600 0.023
EISH- ELSH-
EM28B E25UB
10 ACL- 2.00% 22 ACL- 2.00%
0080- 0660-
380 30 80 7.55 0.17 120/72 380 300 660 52 0.021 243/137
EISC- ELSH-
EM19B E25UB
11 ACL- 2.00% 23 ACL- 2.00%

0090- 0800-
380 37 90 7.55 0.16 120/72 380 380 800 68.5 0.0175 260/175
EISC- ELSH-
EM19B E25UB
12 ACL- 2.00% 24 ACL- 2.00%
0120- 1000-
380 45 120 10.44 0.12 120/92 380 450 1000 68.5 0.014 260/175
EISH- ELSH-
EM13B E14UB
13 ACL- 2.00% 25 ACL- 2.00%
0150- 1200-
380 55 150 14.8 0.095 182/76 380 550 1250 106 0.0011 275/175
ELSH- ELSH-
EM11B E11UB
205 206
26 ACL- 2.00% 18 ACL-

690 185 390 4.00%
1600- 0390
380 630 1600 110 0.0087 275/175
ELSH-
E12UB 19 ACL-
690 220 490 4.00%
0490
20 ACL-
10-11-2.Input reactor(690V) 690 240 530 4.00%
0530
No. Voltage Inductance(mH) Installation
Rated Net 21 ACL-
Model Voltage(V) Power(KW) drop(V) size 690 280 600 4.00%
Current(A) weight(kg) 0600
a/b/d(mm)
22 ACL-
1 ACL- 690 300 660 4.00%
690 1.5 5 4.00% 0660
005
23 ACL-
2 ACL- 690 380 800 4.00%
007 690 2.2 7 4.00% 0800
24 ACL-
3 ACL- 690 450 1000 4.00%
690 3.7 10 4.00% 1000
0010
25 ACL-
4 ACL- 690 550 1250 4.00%
690 5.5 15 4.00% 1200
0015
26 ACL-
5 ACL- 690 630 1600 4.00%
690 7.5 20 4.00% 1600
0020
6 ACL-
690 11 30 4.00% 10-12.Output reactor
0030
10-12-1.Output reactor(380V)
7 ACL-
690 15 40 4.00% No. Voltage Inductance(mH) Installation
0040 Rated Net
Chapter 10
Chapter 10
Model Voltage(V) Power(KW) drop(V) size
8 ACL- Current(A) weight(kg)
690 18.5 50 4.00% a/b/d(mm)
0050
1 OCL-
9 ACL- 0005-
690 22 60 4.00% 380 1.5 5 3.48 0.50% 1.4 91/65
0060 ELSC-
E1M4
10 ACL- 690 30 80 4.00%
0080 2 OCL-
0007-
11 ACL- 380 2.2 7 2.54 0.50% 1 91/65
690 37 90 4.00% ELSC-
0090 E1M0
12 ACL- 3 OCL-
690 45 120 4.00%
0120 0010-
380 3.7 10 2.67 0.50% 0.7 91/65
ELSC-
13 ACL-
690 55 150 4.00% EM70
0150
14 ACL- 4 OCL-
690 75 200 4.00% 0015-
0200 380 5.5 15 3.45 0.50% 0.47 95/61
ELSC-
15 ACL- EM47
690 110 250 4.00%
0250
5 OCL-
16 ACL- 0020-
690 132 290 4.00% 380 7.5 20 3.25 0.50% 0.35 95/61
0290 ELSC-
EM35
17 ACL-
690 160 330 4.00%
0330
207 208
6 OCL- 18 OCL-
0030- 0390-
380 11 30 0.50% 0.23 95/81 380 185 390 26.5 0.50% 0.018 214/106
ELSC- EISH-
EM23 E18U
7 OCL- 19 OCL-
0040- 0490-
380 15 40 0.50% 0.18 95/81 380 220 490 36.6 0.50% 0.014 243/113
ELSC- EISH-
EM18 E14U
8 OCL- 20 OCL-
0050- 0530-
380 18.5 50 0.50% 0.14 95/81 380 240 530 0.50% 0.013
ELSC- EISH-
EM14 E13U
9 OCL- 21 OCL-
0060- 0600-
380 22 60 0.50% 0.12 120/72 380 280 600 43.5 0.50% 0.012 243/128
ELSC- EISH-
EM12 E12U
10 OCL- 22 OCL-
0080- 0660-
380 30 80 6.5 0.50% 0.087 120/72 380 300 660 44 0.50% 0.011 243/128
ELSC- EISH-
E87U E4U0
11 OCL- 23 OCL-
0090- 0800-
380 37 90 6.5 0.50% 0.078 120/72 380 380 800 60.8 0.50% 0.0087 260/175
ELSC- EISH-
E78U E5U0
12 OCL- 24 OCL-
0120- 1000-
Chapter 10
Chapter 10
380 45 120 9.6 0.50% 0.058 120/92 380 450 1000 61.5 0.50% 0.007 260/175
ELSC- EISH-
E5U E4U0
13 OCL- 25 OCL-
0150- 1200-
380 55 150 15 0.50% 0.047 182/87 380 550 1200 89 0.50% 0.0058 275/175
EISH- EISH-
E47U E4U0
14 OCL- 26 OCL-
0200- 1600-
380 75 200 17.3 0.50% 0.035 182/97 380 630 1600 92 0.50% 0.0043 275/175
EISH- EISH-
E35U E3U0
15 OCL-
0250- 10-12-2.Output reactor(690V)
380 110 250 17.8 0.50% 0.028 182/97 No. Voltage Inductance(mH) Installation
EISH-
Rated Net
E28U Model Voltage(V) Power(KW) drop(V) size
Current(A) weight(kg)
a/b/d(mm)
16 OCL-
0290- 1 OCL- 690 1.5 5 2.00%
380 132 290 24.7 0.50% 0.024 214/101
EISH- 005
E24U
2 OCL- 690 2.2 7 2.00%
17 OCL- 007
0330-
380 160 330 26 0.50% 0.021 214/106 3 OCL- 690 3.7 10 2.00%
EISH-
E21U 0010
209 210
4 OCL- 690 5.5 15 2.00% 25 OCL- 690 550 1250 2.00%

0015 1200
5 OCL- 690 7.5 20 2.00% 26 OCL- 690 630 1600 2.00%
0020 1600
6 OCL- 690 11 30 2.00%
0030 10-13.AC reactor
No. Inductance(mH) Installation
7 OCL- 690 15 40 2.00% Rated Net
Model Voltage(V) Power(KW) size
0040 Current(A) weight(kg)
a/b/d(mm)
8 OCL- 690 18.5 50 2.00%
1 DCL-
0050 0003-
380 0.4 3 1.5 28 80/65/110
9 OCL- 690 22 60 2.00% EIDC-
0060 E28M
10 OCL- 690 30 80 2.00% 2 DCL-

0080 0003-
380 0.8 3 1.5 28 80/65/110
EIDC-
11 OCL- 690 37 90 2.00% E28M
0090
3 DCL-
12 OCL- 690 45 120 2.00% 0006-
380 1.5 6 2.3 11 80/65/110
0120 EIDC-
E11M
13 OCL- 690 55 150 2.00%
0150 4 DCL-
0006-
14 OCL- 690 75 200 2.00% 380 2.2 6 2.3 11 80/65/110
EIDC-
0200 E11M
Chapter 10
Chapter 10
15 OCL- 690 110 250 2.00% 5 DCL-
0250 0012-
380 3.7 12 3.2 6.3 100/100/125
EIDC-
16 OCL- 690 132 290 2.00%
E6M3
0290
6 DCL-
17 OCL- 690 160 330 2.00%
0023-
0330 380 5.5 23 3.8 3.6 110/120/135
EIDH-
18 OCL- 690 185 390 2.00% E3M6
0390 7 DCL-
19 OCL- 690 220 490 2.00% 0023-
380 7.5 23 3.8 3.6 110/120/135
0490 EIDH-
E3M6
20 OCL- 690 240 530 2.00%
0530 8 DCL-
0033-
380 11 33 4.3 2 110/120/135
21 OCL- 690 280 600 2.00% EIDH-
0600 E2M0
22 OCL- 690 300 660 2.00% 9 DCL-

0660 0033-
380 15 33 4.3 2 110/120/135
EIDH-
23 OCL- 690 380 800 2.00% E2M0
0800
10 DCL-
24 OCL- 690 450 1000 2.00% 0040-
1000 380 18.5 40 4.3 1.3 110/120/135
EIDH-
E1M3
211 212
11 DCL- 23 DCL-
0050- 0650-
380 22 50 5.5 1.08 120/135/145 380 300 650 33 0.072 235/160/280
EIDH- PIDH-
E1M08 E72U
12 DCL-
0065- 10-14.Specifications of circuit breakers, cables and contactors
380 30 65 7.2 0.8 138/150/170
EIDH- Input
EM8
Circuit line/output line Rated operational current A of contactor
13 DCL- Model
breaker(A) (Copper cable) (voltage 380V or 220V)
0078-
380 37 78 7.5 0.7 138/150/170 mm2
EIDH-
EM7
R40G2 10A 1.5 10
14 DCL-
0095- R75G2 16A 2.5 10
380 45 95 7.8 0.54 138/150/170
EIDH-
EM54 1R5G2 20A 2.5 16
15 DCL- 2R2G2 32A 4 20
0115-
380 55 115 9.2 0.45 155/160/195 004G2 40A 6 25
EIDH-
EM45
5R5G2 63A 6 32
16 DCL-
0160- 7R5G2 100A 10 63
380 75 160 10 0.36 165/130/215
EIDH-
EM36 011G2 125A 10 95
17 DCL- 015G2 160A 25 120

0180-
Chapter 10
Chapter 10
PIDH-
380 90 180 20 0.33 165/130/215 018G2 160A 25 120
EM33
022G2 200A 25 170
18 DCL-
0250- 030G2 200A 35 170
380 110 250 23 0.26 210/150/255
EIDH-
EM26 037G2 250A 35 170
19 DCL- 045G2 250A 70 230

0250-
PIDH-
380 132 250 23 0.26 210/150/255 055G2 315A 70 280
EM26
R75G3 10A 1.5 10
20 DCL-
0340- 1R5G3 16A 1.5 10
380 160 340 23 0.17 210/150/255
PIDH-
EM17
2R2G3 16A 2.5 10
21 DCL- 004G3 25A 2.5 16

0460-
EIDH-
380 185 460 28 0.09 220/150/280 5R5G3 25A 4 16
E90U 7R5G3 40A 4 25
22 DCL-
0460- 011G3 63A 6 32
380 220 460 28 0.09 220/150/280
PIDH-
E90U
015G3 63A 6 50
018G3 100A 10 63
213 214
Chapter 10 Options Chapter 11 Warranty
022G3 100A 10 80
Chapter 11 Warranty
030G3 125A 16 95
037G3 160A 25 120
The warranty of this product follows the following provisions:
045G3 200A 35 135 1.The warranty that liabilities shall be beared by the manufacturer:
055G3 250A 35 170 1-1. For use at home (subject to date of shipment)
※ The refunding, replacement and repair are guaranteed within one(1)
075G3 315A 70 230
month after the shipment.
093G3 400A 70 280 ※ The replacement and repair are guaranteed within three(3) months after
110G3 400A 95 315 the shipment.
※ The repair is guaranteed within twelve(12) months after the shipment.
132G3 400A 95 380
1-2.For use at abroad(excluding domestic), the repair is guaranteed at the place of
160G3 630A 150 450 purchase within six(6) months after the shipment.
187G3 630A 185 500 2. Whenever and wherever you use our brand of products, you can enjoy a paid service
for life.
200G3 630A 240 580 3.Our distributors, manufacturers and agencies across the country can provide after-
220G3 800A 150x2 630 sales service of this product, the conditions of service are:
3-1. The service of inspection is provided locally at a inspection standard of level 3.
250G3 800A 150x2 700
3-2. All services shall comply with the related after-sale service terms and
280G3 1000A 185x2 780 conditions stated on theagency agreement between Powtran and distributors.
315G3 1200A 240x2 900 3-3. A paid after-sale service from distributors or agencies of Powtran(whether or
not within warranty period) can be requested.
Chapter 10
355G3 1280A 240x2 960
4. We only bear the above terms 1-1 or 1-2 at most regarding to the responsibility of
400G3 1380A 185x3 1035 product quality or incidents. if users need more liability guarantee, please apply for
Chapter 11
500G3 1720A 185x3 1290 insurance company in advance to insure your own property safety.
5. The warranty period of this product is one year from the date of shipment.
6. The failure caused by following causes will even during the warranty period, their
repair will be charged too:
6-1.Incorrect operation (subject to the user manual) or unauthorized repair or
renovation.
6-2.Non-following standard specification to use the inverter.
6-3.Drop or improper carry after purchase.
6-4.Aging or failure caused by the adverse environmental.
6-5.Damage caused by earthquake, fire, wind and water disasters, lightning,
abnormal voltage or othernatural disasters and accompanied disasters.
6-6.Damage during transport (Note: The mode of transport is specified by the
customer, this company can assist customer to transfer goods).
6-7.The brand, trademark, serial number, nameplate labeled by the manufacturer
are damaged or illegible.
6-8.The full money for this product has not been paid up according to purchase
215 216
Appendix I Chapter 11 Warranty
agreement
6-9.The actual situation for installation, wiring, operation, maintenance or other
uses could not be objectively reported to the service department of this Appendix I RS485 Communication protocol
company.
7.The refunding, replacement or repair only can be performed after the defective
product is returned to this company and its responsible party is confirmed.
I-1 Communication protocol
I-1-1 Communication content
This serial communication protocol defines the transmission information and
use format in the series communication Including: master polling( or broadcast)
format; master encoding method, and contents including: function code of action,
transferring data and error checking. The response of slave also adopts the same
structure, and contents including: action confirmation, returning the data and error
checking etc. If slave takes place the error while it is receiving information or cannot
finish the action demanded by master, it will send one fault signal to master as a
response.
Application Method
The inverter will be connected into a “Single-master Multi-slave” PC/PLC
control network with RS232/RS485 bus.
Bus structure
(1) Interface mode
RS232/RS485 hardware interface
(2) Transmission mode
Asynchronous series and half-duplex transmission mode. For master and slave,
only one of them can send the data and the other only receives the data at the same
time. In the series asynchronous communication, the data is sent out frame by frame
in the form of message
(3) Topological structure
Single-master and multi-slave system. The setting range of slave address is 0 to
247, and 0 refers to broadcast communication address. The address of slave for
network must be exclusive.
I-1-2 Communications connection
Installation of RS485 communication module:
I-1-3 Protocol description

PI9000 series inverter communication protocol is a asynchronous serial master-
slave communication protocol, in the network, only one equipment(master) can
build a protocol (known as “Inquiry/Command”). Other equipment(slave) only can
response the "Inquiry/Command"of master by providing data or perform the
corresponding action according to the "Inquiry/Command"of master. Here, the
master refers to a Personnel Computer(PC), an industrial control device or a
programmable logic controller (PLC), etc. and the slave refers to PI9000 inverter.
Master can communicate with individual slave, also send broadcasting information
to all the lower slaves. For the single "Inquiry/Command"of master, slave will return
a signal(that is a response) to master; for the broadcasting information sent by
master, slave does not need to feedback a response to master.
217 218
Appendix I Appendix I
Communication data structure PI9000 series inverter's Modbus protocol CRC CHKlow-order
CRC CHK values are to be calculated
communication data format is as follows: in RTU mode, messages are sent at a silent CRC CHKhigh-order
interval of at least 3.5 characters. There are diverse character intervals under
network baud rate, Slave responding information
which is easiest implemented (as shown in Figure T1-T2-T3-T4). The first field When Ud.05 is set to 0:
transmitted is the device address. ADR 01H
The allowable characters for transmitting are hexadecimal 0 ... 9, A ... F. The CMD 03H
networked devices continuously monitor network bus, including during the silent Byte number high-order 00H
intervals. When the first field (the address field) is received, each device decodes it Byte number low-order 04H
to find out if it is sent to their own. Following the last transmitted character, a silent DataU002Hhigh-order 00H
interval of at least 3.5 characters marks the end of the message. A new message can DataU002Hlow-order 00H
begin after this silent interval. 00H
DataU003Hhigh-order
The entire message frame must be transmitted as a continuous stream. If a
DataU003Hlow-order 01H
silent interval of more than 1.5 characters occurs before completion of the frame, the
CRC CHKlow-order
receiving device will flushes the incomplete message and assumes that the next byte CRC CHK values are to be calculated
CRC CHKhigh-order
will be the address field of a new message. Similarly, if a new message begins
earlier than the interval of 3.5 characters following a previous message, the
receiving device will consider it as a continuation of the previous message. This will When Ud.05 is set to 1:
result in an error, because the value in the final CRC field is not right. ADR 01H
RTUframe format : CMD 03H
Frame headerSTART Time interval of 3.5characters Byte number 04H
Slave address ADR Communication address: 1 to 247 DataU002Hhigh-order 00H
DataU002Hlow-order 00H
Command codeCMD 03: read slave parameters；06: write slave parameters 00H
DataU003Hhigh-order
Data contentDATA(N-1) DataU003Hlow-order 01H
Data contentDATA(N-2) CRC CHKlow-order
Data content: address of function code parameter, numbers of CRC CHK values are to be calculated
……………………… function code parameter, value of function code parameter, etc. CRC CHKhigh-order
Data contentDATA0
Command Code: 06H, write a word. For example:Write 5000(1388H)into the address F00AH
CRC CHKhigh-order of the inverter with slave address 02H.
Detection Value:CRC value.
CRC CHKlow-order Master command information
END Time interval of 3.5characters ADR 02H
CMD (Command) and DATA (data word description) CMD 06H
Data address high-order F0H
Command code: 03H, reads N words (max.12 words), for example: for the inverter with slave Data address low-order 0AH
address 01, its start address U0.02 continuously reads two values. Data content high-order 13H
Master command information Data content low-order 88H
ADR 01H CRC CHKlow-order
CRC CHK values are to be calculated
CMD 03H CRC CHK high-order
Start address high-order F0H
Start address low-order 02H
Slave responding information
Number of registers high- 00H
ADR 02H
order
Number of registers low- 02H CMD 06H
order Data address high-order F0H
219 220
Data address low-order 0AH crc_value=crc_value>>1;

Data content high-order 13H }
Data content low-order 88H }
CRC CHKlow-order
CRC CHK values are to be calculated }
CRC CHK high-order
return（crc_value）;
I-2 Check mode: }
Check mode - CRC mode: CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check) adopts RTU
frame format, the message includes a an error-checking field that is based on CRC
method. The CRC field checks the whole content of message. The CRC field has
two bytes containing a 16-bit binary value. The CRC value calculated by the
transmitting device will be added into to the message. The receiving device
recalculates the value of the received CRC, and compares the calculated value to the
actual value of the received CRC field, if the two values are not equal, then there is
an error in the transmission.
The CRC firstly stores 0xFFFF and then calls for a process to deal with the
successive eight-bit bytes in message and the value of the current register. Only the
8-bit data in each character is valid to the CRC, the start bit and stop bit, and parity
bit are invalid.
During generation of the CRC, each eight-bit character is exclusive OR(XOR)
with the register contents separately, the result moves to the direction of least
significant bit(LSB), and the most significant bit(MSB) is filled with 0. LSB will be
picked up for detection, if LSB is 1, the register will be XOR with the preset value
separately, if LSB is 0, then no XOR takes place. The whole process is repeated
eight times. After the last bit (eighth) is completed, the next eight-bit byte will be
XOR with the register's current value separately again. The final value of the register
is the CRC value that all the bytes of the message have been applied.
When the CRC is appended to the message, the low byte is appended firstly,
followed by the high byte. CRC simple functions is as follows:
unsigned int crc_chk_value（unsigned char *data_value,unsigned char length）
{
unsigned int crc_value=0xFFFF;
int i;
while（length--）
{
crc_value^=*data_value++;
for（i=0;i<8;i++）
{
if（crc_value&0x0001）
{
c r c _ va l u e = （ c r c _ va l u e > > 1 ）^0xa001;
}
else
{
221 222
I-3 Definition of communication parameter address 100B AI2 voltage

The section is about communication contents, it’s used to control the operation, 100C Reserve
status and related parameter settings of the inverter. Read and write function-code 100D Count value input
parameters (Some functional code is not changed, only for the manufacturer use or
100E Length value input
monitoring): the rules of labeling function code parameters address:
The group number and label number of function code is used to indicate the 100F Load speed
parameter address: 1010 PID setting
High byte: F0 to FF (U group), A0 to AF (E group), 70 to 7F (d group) low byte:
1011 PID feedback
00 to FF
For example: address U3.12 indicates F30C; Note: UF group parameters: 1012 PLC step
neither read nor change; d group parameters: only read, not change. 1013 High-speed pulse input frequency, unit: 0.01kHz
Some parameters can not be changed during operation, but some parameters 1014 Feedback speed, unit:0.1Hz
can not be changed regardless of the inverter is in what state.When changing the
1015 Remaining run time
function code parameters, please pay attention to the scope, units, and relative
instructions on the parameter. 1016 AI1 voltage before correction
Besides, due to EEPROM is frequently stored, it will reduce the life of 1017 AI2 voltage before correction
EEPROM, therefore under the communication mode some function code do not need
1018 Reserve
to be stored and you just change the RAM value.
If U group parameters need to achieve the function, as long as change high 1019 Linear speed
order F of the function code address to 0. If E group parameters need to achieve the 101A Current power-on time
function, as long as change high order F of the function code address to 4. The 101B Current run time
corresponding function code addresses are indicated below: high byte: 00 to 0F(U
group), 40 to 4F (E group), low byte:00 to FF 101C High-speed pulse input frequency, unit: 1Hz
For example: 101D Communication set value
Function code U3.12 can not be stored into EEPROM, address indicates as 101E Actual feedback speed
030C; function code U0.05 can not be stored into EEPROM, address indicates as
101F Master frequency A display
4005; the address indicates that only writing RAM can be done and reading can not
be done, when reading, it is invalid address. For all parameters, you can also use the 1020 Auxiliary frequency B display
command code 07H to achieve the function.
Stop/Run parameters section:
Note:
Parameter address Parameter description the communication set value is the percentage of the relative value, 10000
1000 *Communication set value(-10000 to 10000)(Decimal) corresponds to 100.00%, -10000 corresponds to -100.00%. For frequency dimension
1001 Running frequency data, it is the percentage of the maximum frequency (U0.10); for torque dimension
1002
data, the percentage is U2.10, E2.48 (torque upper limit digital setting, respectively
Bus voltage
corresponding to the first and second).
1003 Output voltage
1004 Output current Control command is input to the inverter: (write only)
1005 Output power Command word address Command function
1006 Output torque 0001: Forward run
1007 Operating speed 0002: Reverse run
1008 2000 0003: Forward Jog
DI input flag
1009 DO output flag 0004: Reverse Jog
100A AI1 voltage 0005: Free stop
223 224
0006: Deceleration and stop 0000: No fault

0001: Reserved
0007: Fault reset 0002: Acceleration overcurrent
0003: Deceleration overcurrent
0004: Constant speed overcurrent
Inverter read status: (read-only) 0005: Acceleration overvoltage
0006: Deceleration overvoltage
Status word address Status word function 0007: Constant speed overvoltage
0001: Forward run 0008: Buffer resistance overload
0009: Undervoltage fault
3000 0002: Reverse run 000A: Inverter overload
0003: Stop 000B: Motor Overload
000C: Input phase loss
Parameter lock password verification: (If the return code is 8888H, it indicates that password 000D: Output phase loss
verification is passed) 000E: Module overheating
000F: External fault
Password address Enter password 0010: Communication abnormal
1F00 ***** 0011: Contactor abnormal
0012: Current detection fault
0013: Motor parameter auto tunning fault
8000 0014:Encoder/PG card abnormal
Digital output terminal control: (write only) 0015: Parameter read and write abnormal
0016: Inverter hardware fault
Command address Command content
0017: Motor short to ground fault
BIT0: SPA output control 0018: Reserved
BIT1: RELAY2 output control 0019: Reserved
001A:Running time arrival
BIT2 RELAY1 output control
2001 001B: Custom fault 1
BIT3: Undefined 001C: Custom fault 2
BIT4: SPB switching quantity output control 001D: Power-on time arrival
001E: Load drop
001F: PID feedback loss when running
0028: Fast current limiting timeout
0029: Switch motor when running fault
Analog output DA1 control: (write only) 002A: Too large speed deviation
Command address Command content 002B: Motor overspeed
002D: Motor overtemperature
2002 0 to 7FFFindicates0％ to 100％ 005A: Encoder lines setting error
005B: Missed encoder
005C: Initial position error
Analog output DA2 control: (write only) 005E: Speed feedback error
Command address Command content
2003 0 to 7FFFindicates0％ to 100％ Data on communication failure information description (fault code):
Communication fault address Fault function description

SPB high-speed pulse output control: (write only) 0000: No fault
0001: Password error
Command address Command content 0002: Command code error
2004 0 to 7FFFindicates0％ to 100％ 0003: CRC check error
8001 0004: Invalid address
0005: Invalid parameters
0006: Invalid parameter changes
Inverter fault description: 0007: System locked
0008: EEPROM in operation
Inverter fault address: Inverter fault information:
225 226
UdGroup - Communication parameter description failure error (Fault ID Err.16). Generally, it is set to invalid. If the parameter can be set to monitor
the communication status in continuous communication system.
Baud rate Default 6005
Units digit: MODUBUS baud rate Communication Default 0
0: 300BPS Ud.05 protocol selection 0: non-standard Modbus protocol
1: 600BPS Setting range
2: 1200BPS 1: standard Modbus protocol
Ud.00 3: 2400BPS Ud.05=1: select standard Modbus protocol.
Setting range 4: 4800BPS
5: 9600BPS Ud.05=0: when reading command, the number of bytes returned by slave is more 1 byte than
6: 19200BPS standard Modbus protocol.
7: 38400BPS
8: 57600BPS Communication read Default 0
9: 115200BPS current resolution
Ud.05 0: 0.01A
This parameter is used to set the data transfer rate between the host computer and the inverter. Note: Setting range
1: 0.1A
the baud rate must be set to the same for the host computer and the inverter, otherwise
communication can not be achieved. The larger baud rate, the faster communication speed. Used to determine the current output units when communication reads output current.
Data format Default 0

0: no parity: data format <8, N, 2>
Ud.01 1: even parity: data format <8, E, 1>
Setting range
2: odd parity: data format <8, O, 1>
3: no parity: data format <8-N-1>
Note: the set data for the host computer and the inverter must be the same.
This unit address Default 1
Ud.02
Setting range 1 to 247, 0for broadcast address
When the address of this unit is set 0, that is broadcast address, the broadcasting function for the
host computer can be achieved.
The address of this unit has uniqueness (in addition to the broadcast address), which is the basis of
peer-to-peer communication for the host computer and the inverter.
Response delay Default 2ms
Ud.03
Setting range 0 to 20ms
Response delay: it refers to the interval time from the end of the inverter receiving data to the start
of it sending data to the host machine. If the response delay is less than the system processing time,
then the response delay time is subject to the system processing time; If the response delay is
longer than the system processing time, after the system finises the data processing, and continues
to wait until the response delay time, and then sends data to the host computer.
Communication Default 0.0 s
Ud.04 timeout time
Setting range 0.0 s(invalid)
0.1 to 60.0s
Communication time-out parameter is not valid when the function code is set to 0.0s.
Whenthe function code is set to valid, if the interval time between one communication and the next
communication exceeds the communication time-out time, the system will report communication
227 228
Appendix II Appendix I
Appendix II How to use universal encoder expansion card signal positive

4 B- Encoder output B
signal negative
(applicable for all series of Powtran frequency inverters)
5 Z+ Encoder output Z
II-1 Overview signal positive
PI9000 is equipped with a variety of universal encoder expansion card (PG 6 Z- Encoder output Z
card), as an optional accessory, it is necessary part for the inverter closed-loop signal negative
vector control, please select PG card according to the form of encoder output, the 7 5V Output 5V/100mA
specific models are as follows: power
Options Description Others 8 COM Power ground
Differential input PG card, Terminal 9 PE Shielded terminal
PI9000_PG1
without frequency dividing output wiring UVWdifferential PG card
UVW differential input PG card, Terminal PI9000_PG3 specifications
PI9000_PG3
without frequency dividing output wiring User Terminal block
Rotational transformer PG card Terminal interface
PI9000_PG4
wiring Swappable NO
OC input PG card, with 1:1 Terminal Wire gauge >22AWG
PI9000_PG5
frequency dividing output wiring Maximum 500kHz
frequency
II-2 Description of mechanical installation and control terminals
function Input ≤7V
The expansion card specifications and terminal signals for each encoder are differential
defined as follows: signal amplitude
Table 1 Definitions of specifications and terminal signals PI9000_ PG3 terminal description
Differential PG card(PI9000_PG1) No. Label no. Description
PI9000_PG1 specifications 1 A+ Encoder output A
User Terminal block signal positive
interface 2 A- Encoder output A
Spacing 3.5mm signal negative
Screw Slotted 3 B+ Encoder output B
Swappable NO signal positive
Wire gauge 16-26AWG 4 B- Encoder output B
signal negative
Maximum 500kHz
frequency 5 Z+ Encoder output Z
signal positive
Input ≤7V
6 Z- Encoder output Z
differential
signal negative
signal amplitude
7 U+ Encoder output P
PI9000_PG1 terminal signals
signal positive
No. Label no. Description
8 U- Encoder output P
1 A+ Encoder output A
signal negative
signal positive
9 V+ Encoder output V
2 A- Encoder output A
signal positive
signal negative
10 V- Encoder output V
3 B+ Encoder output B
signal negative
11 W+ Encoder output W
229 230
Appendix II Appendix I
signal positive frequency

12 W- Encoder output W PI9000_PG5 terminal description
signal negative No. Label no. Description
13 +5V Output 5V/100mA 1 A Encoder output A
power signal
14 COM Power ground 2 B Encoder output B
15 - signal
Rotational transformer PG card(PI9000_ PG4) 3 Z Encoder output Z
PI9000_PG4 specifications signal
User interface Terminal block 4 15V Output 15V/100mA
Swappable NO power
Wire gauge >22AWG 5 COM Power ground
Resolution 12-bit 6 COM Power ground
Excitation 10kHz 7 A1 PG card A 1:1
frequency feedback output A
VRMS 7V signal
VP-P 3.15±27% 8 B1 PG card A 1:1
PI9000_PG4 terminal description feedback output B
No. Label no. Description signal
1 EXC1 Rotary transformer 9 PE Shielded terminal
excitation negative
2 EXC Rotary transformer
excitation positive
3 SIN Rotary transformer
feedback SIN positive
4 SINLO Rotary transformer
feedback SIN negative
5 COS Rotary transformer
feedback COS
positive
6 -
7 -
8 -
9 COSLO Rotary transformer
feedback COS
negative
OC PG card(PI9000_PG5)
PI9000_PG5 specifications
User interface Terminal block
Spacing 3.5mm
Screw Slotted
Swappable NO
Wire gauge 16-26AWG
Maximum 100KHz
231 232
Customer Feedback Form of Powtran Inverter
Warranty Card
Failure
Sincerely thank you purchase Powtran products !
This product has passed the strict quality inspection by Powtran. According to the Dear Customer: please fill out the form below in details so that we may better serve you:
instructions of this warranty card, Powtran will be responsible for free maintenance for Load and control situation
all hardware failures caused by product quality problem under normal use during the
Frequency
warranty period. Electrical range
power Rated motor
and poles current under normal
Product Model: Serial Number: working
□Fan□Textile
machine□Extruder Speed □Keyboard □Terminal
Warranty period: Load type control
□Pump□Injection mode □PID □Host computer
machine□Other load
Date of purchase: Year Month Day Control □V/F control without PG □V/F control with PG □Vector
method control with PG
Invoice Number: Failure phenomenon

When □power-on □start run □in operation
failure
occurs □accelerate □decelerate
Failure type
User Name: Abnormal
current □Err.02 □Err.03 □Err.04□Err.40
(Or company name)
Abnormal □Err.05 □Err.06 □Err.07 □Err.09
voltage
Address:
Other
display □Err.14 □Err.15 □Err.20□Err.21□Err.31
failure
Zip: Phone: Fax:
Board □no display after power on □smoking after power on
failure □power board relay does not pull-in
Keyboard □button malfunction □parameter can not be modified
failure □imperfect display □knob malfunction
Device □burnt □fan does not work □main circuit relay or contactor does not
Dealer Name: failure pull-in □power resistors burned out
Abnormal □no output voltage □output voltage unbalance □motor with large
Address: output vibrations □motor power inadequate
If your failure is not listed above, Please describe in the following:
Zip: Phone: Fax: Failure description:
Dealer stamp The following fields shall be filled out by maintenance agency
Maintenance records:
- 233 - - 234 -
Full name of Product Information Feedback
maintenance Tel
Dear user:
agency
Thank you for your interest in and purchasing Powtran products! In order to better
Zip serve you, we want to be able to timely get your personal information and the related
1st time Address information of the purchased Powtran products so as to understand your current and
Code
future further demand to Powtran products, we would appreciate your valuable feedback.
For your convenience, please visit our websitehttp://www.powtran.com and then click
Maintenance Signat
"Technologies and Services"and "Download" columns to submit your feedback
voucher ure of information.
number the
1) Download the update product manuals you need
Full name of 2) View the technical information on products, such as operation instructions,
maintenance Tel specifications and features, FAQ, etc.
3) Share application cases.
agency 4) Technical advisory and online feedback
5) Feedback the product and demand information for via e-mail
2nd Zip 6) Inquire the latest products and access to various types of warranty and extend
Address additional services
time Code
Maintenance Signat
voucher ure of
number the
Full name of
maintenance Tel
agency
3rd Zip
Address
time Code
Maintenance Signat
voucher ure of
number the
- 235 - - 236 -

Powtran PI500 7R5G3 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Powtran PI500 7R5G3 Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Powtran PI500 7R5G3 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Foreword Table of contents

Chapter 3 Keyboard ...............................................................................................33

PI9100-0R7G2 0.75 5 3.8 0.75 9S2

PI9100-1R5G2 1.5 5.8 5.1 1.5 9S2

PI9100-2R2G2 2.2 10.5 9 2.2 9S3

PI9100-3R7G2 3.7 14.6 13 3.7 9S3

PI9200-5R5G2 5.5 26 25 5.5 9L1

PI9200-7R5G2 3-phase 7.5 35 32 7.5 9L1

PI9200-011G2 220V 11 46.5 45 11 9L1

PI9200-022G2 22.0 91 90 22.0 9L3

PI9200-030G2 30.0 112.0 110 30.0 9L3

PI9200-037G2 37.0 157 152 37.0 9L3

PI9200-045G2 45.0 180 176 45.0 9L4

PI9200-055G2 55.0 214 210 55.0 9L4

PI9200-075G2 75 307 304 75 9L4

PI9100-0R7G3 3-phase 0.75 3.4 2.1 0.75 9S2

frequency levels Multi-speed Achieve up to 16-speed operation through the control

Items Specifications Items Specifications

Below 1000m, below 5.9m/s² (= 0.6g)

2-3.Dimensions 2-3-2.PI9100 series

Power Power Dimensions Installation size

Power Power Dimensions Installation size

2-3-3.PI9200 series 3) 9L3

phase 9L4 660 364 280 640 250 Ø10

2-3-6.Keyboard size diagram

LOCAL/RE operation and remote operation (communication control)

HzAV Units indicator

parameters: (Set U0.01)

U1.07:asynchronous motor rotor resistance

U1.09: asynchronous motor mutual inductance

Select suitable frequency source

(Set U0.03, U0.04, U0.07, etc)

Select motor start-up mode

Select appropriate ac/deceleration time

(Set U0.17, U0.18)

Select motor stop mode

Start motor to run, observe the phenomenon,

if abnor mal, please re fer to the troubleshooting.

NO Achieve the required control effe ct?

d0 Monitoring Monitoring frequency, current, etc 36 41

U0 Basic function Frequency setting, control mode, 25

U1 Motor parameters To set motor parameter 23 49

U2 Vector control Vector control parameters 10 51

U3 V/F control V/F control parameters 12 53

U4 Input terminals Analog and digital input functions 40 54

U5 Output terminals Analog and digital output 20 59

U6 Start and stop Start and stop control parameters 16 62

Reference Factory Reference

Inverter output Effective value for actual 90

Factory Reference Factory Reference

Linear speed calculated Display run, standby and

Parameter Factory Reference Parameter Factory Reference

0: Keyboard set frequency Units digit: frequency source

Parameter Factory Reference Parameter Factory Reference

Factory Reference Factory Reference

5-1-4.U2 Group - Vector control parameters Upper limit digital

Factory Reference Factory Reference

95. Excitation regulator 107. VF voltage point

0: linear V/F 111.